6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

215
8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 1/215  6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY GRE130 © TOSHIBA Corporation 2011  All Rights Reserved. ( Ver. 1.1 ) 

Transcript of 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

Page 1: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 1/215

  6  F  2  T 0 1 7 6

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY 

GRE130 

©  TOSHIBA Corporation 2011 

 All Rights Reserved. 

( Ver. 1.1 ) 

Page 2: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 2/215

 

    1    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Safety Precautions

Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Beforeinstalling and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbo ls used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed byimportant safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death orserious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

CAUTION  Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result inminor injury or moderate injury.

CAUTION  Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

Page 3: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 3/215

 

    2    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generatedis dangerous.

  Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the powersupply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION 

  Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION   Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dustdetailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

  Ratings

Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to theequipment ratings.

  Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as thismay cause the equipment to malfunction.

  External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check thesupply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

  Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

  Power supply

If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records,event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoringthe power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertaindata.

  Modification

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

  Disposal

This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposingof this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. Ifany points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

DANGER

Page 4: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 4/215

 

    3    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Contents

Safety Precautions 1 

1.  Introduction 6 

2.   Appl ication Notes 8 

2.1  Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 8 

2.1.1  Phase Overvoltage Protection 8 

2.1.2  Phase Undervoltage Protection 12 

2.1.3  Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 16 

2.1.4  Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 19 

2.2  Frequency Protection 22 

2.2.1  Frequency element 22 

2.2.2  Frequency rate-of-change element 22 2.3  Trip and Alarm Signal Output 27 

3.  Technical Description 29 

3.1  Hardware Description 29 

3.1.1  Outline of Hardware Modules 29 

3.2  Input and Output Signals 31 

3.2.1  AC Input Signals 31 

3.2.2  Binary Input Signals 31 

3.2.3  Binary Output Signals 34 

3.3   Automatic Supervision 36 

3.3.1  Basic Concept of Supervision 36 

3.3.2  Relay Monitoring 36 

3.3.3  Trip Circuit Supervision 37 

3.3.4  Circuit Breaker Monitoring 38 

3.3.5  Failure Alarms 39 

3.3.6  Trip Blocking 40 

3.3.7  Setting 40 

3.4  Recording Function 41 

3.4.1  Fault Recording 41 

3.4.2  Event Recording 41 

3.4.3  Disturbance Recording 42 

3.5  Metering Function 44 

4.  User Interface 45 

4.1  Outline of User Interface 45 

4.1.1  Front Panel 45 

4.1.2  Communication Ports 47 

4.2  Operation of the User Interface 48 

4.2.1  LCD and LED Displays 48 

4.2.2  Relay Menu 51 4.2.3  Displaying Records 53 

4.2.4  Status Display 60 

Page 5: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 5/215

 

    4    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.5  Viewing the Settings 64 

4.2.6  Changing the Settings 66 

4.2.7 Control 97 

4.2.8  Testing 99 

4.3  Personal Computer Interface 102 

4.4  Modbus Interface 102 

4.5  Clock Function 102 

4.6  Special Mode 103 

5.  Installation 105 

5.1  Receipt of Relays 105 

5.2  Relay Mounting 105 

5.2.1  Flush Mounting 105 

5.3  Electrostatic Discharge 107 

5.4  Handling Precautions 107 

5.5  External Connections 107 

6.  Commissioning and Maintenance 108 

6.1  Outline of Commissioning Tests 108 

6.2  Cautions 108 

6.2.1  Safety Precautions 108 

6.2.2  Precautions for Testing 109 

6.3  Preparations 110 

6.4  Hardware Tests 111 

6.4.1  User Interfaces 111 

6.4.2  Binary Input Circuits 111 6.4.3  Binary Output Circuits 112 

6.4.4  AC Input Circuits 113 

6.5  Function Test 114 

6.5.1  Measuring Element 114 

6.5.2  Protection Scheme 119 

6.5.3  Metering and Recording 120 

6.6  Conjunctive Tests 120 

6.6.1  On Load Test 120 

6.6.2  Tripping Circuit Test 120 

6.7  Maintenance 122 

6.7.1  Regular Testing 122 

6.7.2  Failure Tracing and Repair 122 

6.7.3  Replacing Failed Relay Unit 123 

6.7.4  Resumption of Service 123 

6.7.5  Storage 123 

7.  Putting Relay into Service 124 

Page 6: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 6/215

Page 7: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 7/215

 

    6    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

1. Introduction

GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distributionsubstations, generators, motors and transformers.

The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.

  Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics

  Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.

  Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection

  Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following functions.

  Two settings groups

  Configurable binary inputs and outputs

  Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring

  Control hierarchy change

  Trip circuit supervision

  Automatic self-supervision

  Menu-based HMI system

  Configurable LED indication

  Metering and recording functions

  Front mounted USB port for PC communications

  Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication

  Rear mounted RJ45 port for Optional Connection

GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits arealso monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad andmenu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via afront-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. Thecommunication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access datagathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication withsubstation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.

Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by each member.

Page 8: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 8/215

 

    7    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Funct ions

GRE130 -Model Number

410

[APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PP 3PN 3PV

O/V IDMT              

O/V DT              

U/V IDMT              

U/V DT              

ZPS IDMT       *  

ZPS DT       *  

NPS IDMT          

NPS DT          

FRQ            

DFRQ            

Trip circuit supervision              

Self supervision              

CB state monitoring              

Trip counter alarm              

Multiple settings groups              

Metering              

Fault records              

Event records              

Disturbance records              MODBUS RTUcommunication

             

[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input

Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0 IDMT: inverse definite minimum time

DT: definite timeO/V: overvoltage protectionU/V: undervoltage protectionZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltageFRQ: Frequency protectionDFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection(): V0 calculated from three phase voltages

CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.

Page 9: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 9/215

 

    8    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2. Application Notes

2.1 Overvol tage and Undervoltage Protection

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmabledropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) ordefinite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined byequation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )

1a

k t G TMS c

V Vs

  (1) 

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. Thesecurves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Table 2.1.1 Specifi cation of Inverse Time Curves

Curve Description k a c

“IDMT” 1 1 0

“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000

by 0.001 step

0.00 – 5.00

by 0.01 step

0.000 – 5.000

by 0.001 step

V0 

Pickup

Dropoff 

Page 10: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 10/215

 

    9    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

1 1.5 2 2.5 3

 Applied Voltage (x Vs)

   O  p  e  r  a   t   i  n  g   T   i  m  e   (  s  e  c  s   )

TMS = 1

TMS = 2

TMS = 5

TMS = 10

 

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when theinverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then nointentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, theelement returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below thereset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timingfunction (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.

The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristicas shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, andtrip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time

 protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.

The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in

Page 11: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 11/215

 

    10    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protectionOV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.

The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].

1()

OV1INST

2()

3()

1

1

1

OV1_TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV1t 0

0

0

&

&

&

&

&

&1()

OV1 2()

3()

OV1-C_TRIP

OV1-A_TRIP

OV1-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV1EN]

+

1

63

64

65

101

102

103

10451

52

53

1OV1_BLOCK15

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

1()OV2INST

2()

3()

1

1

1

OV2_TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV2

t 0

0

0

&

&

&

&

&

&1()

OV2 2()

3()

OV2-C_TRIP

OV2-A_TRIP

OV2-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV2EN]

+

1

66

67

68

108

109

110

11157

58

59

1OV2_BLOCK16

Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection

OV3_ ALARM 10.00 - 300.00s

TOV3

t 0

0

0

&

&

&1()

OV3 2()

3()

OV3-C_ ALARM

OV3-A_ALARM

OV3-B_ ALARM&

&

&

[OV3EN]

+

69

70

71

115

116

117

118

1OV3_BLOCK17

Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection

( )Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

Page 12: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 12/215

 

    11    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

[APPL] settingPhase

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP

1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase

2 -  -  B - C phase B phase B - C phase

3 -  -  -  C phase C - A phase

Setting

The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their settingranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable

[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable

[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable

Page 13: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 13/215

 

    12    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite timecharacteristic only. 

Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

V 0 

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )

1a

k t G TMS c

V Vs

  (2) 

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = undervoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. Thesecurves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when theinverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then nointentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, theelement returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period withoutcausing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising

voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it hastravelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Page 14: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 14/215

 

    13    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Undervoltage Inverse Time

Curves

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

 Appl ied Vo ltage (x Vs)

   O  p  e  r  a   t   i  n  g   T   i  m  e   (  s  e  c  s   )

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

 

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.

The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown inFigure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signalUV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection isenabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.

The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shownin Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.

Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.

The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].

In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltagesdrop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used)when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for loadshedding.

 Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.

Page 15: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 15/215

Page 16: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 16/215

 

    15    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

[APPL] settingPhase

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP

1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase

2 -  -  B - C phase B phase B - C phase

3 -  -  -  C phase C - A phase

Setting

The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their settingranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.

VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/C

DT UV1 Enable

[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable

[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/

C

DT UV2 Enable

[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable

Page 17: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 17/215

 

    16    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection onunearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd  harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3 rd  harmonicfilter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.

For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.

  Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-deltaconnection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.

  Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114.

 A B C

GRE130

V0 

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

GRE130

 A B

V0 

G

Resistor

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable fordefinite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC60255-127:

Page 18: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 18/215

 

    17    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  

  

  c

k TMS Gt 

1

)(

  (3) 

where:t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),

V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If

required, set the scheme switch [ZPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

ZPS Overvoltage

Inverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20

 Appl ied Vo l tage (x Vs)

   O  p  e  r  a   t   i  n  g

   T   i  m  e   (  s  e  c  s   )

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

 

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS

Page 19: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 19/215

 

    18    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation isidentical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independentthresholds output trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1and TZPS2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].

ZPS1

ZPS1 TRIP10.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS1

t 0

  1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS1EN]

+

1

93

ZPS1INST

197134

ZPS1_BLOCK21

Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection

ZPS2

ZPS2_ALARM10.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS2

t 0

  1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS2EN]

+

1

94

ZPS2INST

198135

ZPS2_BLOCK22

Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting

The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default RemarksZPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.

TZPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=IDMT.

TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS1 definite time delayed reset.

ZPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.

TZPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=IDMT.

TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT.

TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS2 definite time delayed reset.

[ZPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZPS1 Enable

[ZPS2EN] Off / On Off ZPS2 Enable

Page 20: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 20/215

 

    19    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalanceconditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.

The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be

caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss canlead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.

The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, ifthe phase sequence is reversed.

Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable fordefinite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC60255-127.

  

  

  c

k TMS Gt 

1

)(2

   (4) 

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),

V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. Ifrequired, set the scheme switch [NPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c.These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Page 21: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 21/215

 

    20    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

NPS Overvoltage

Inverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 2 0

 Applied Voltage (x Vs)

   O  p  e  r  a   t   i  n  g   T   i  m  e   (  s  e  c  s   )

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

 

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS

Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay isused. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds outputtrip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.

The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].

NPS1

NPS1 TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS1

t 0

  1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS1EN]

+

1

95

NPS1

INST

199136

NPS1_BLOCK23

Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection

Page 22: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 22/215

 

    21    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

NPS2

NPS2_ALARM10.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS2

t 0

  1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS2EN]

+

1

96

NPS2INST

200137

NPS2_BLOCK 24

Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting

The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring

elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately200ms.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

NPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.

TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.

TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS1 definite time delayed reset.

NPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.

TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.

TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS2 definite time delayed reset.

[NPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NPS1 Enable

[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable

Page 23: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 23/215

 

    22    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuringelements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.

Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generationcapability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by loadshedding. 

Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damagedue to overfrequency conditions.

Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quicklywhen the frequency change is very rapid.

A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.2.1 Frequency element

Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the settingvalue.

Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the settingvalue.

These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutivetimes.

The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.

Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt).GRE130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and afrequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a timeinterval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operatewhen the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.

The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element(FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.

Hz 

0 FVBLK setting

  V

UF setting

OF setting

UF

OF

Page 24: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 24/215

 

    23    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Hz 

Δf 

Δt

sec 

Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Scheme Logic

Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency

element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequencydecay rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under thecondition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.

FRQ1 TRIP

F12

F11 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00S

t   0&

FRQ1 BLOCK 1

Scheme Logic

Selection : [Logic1]

F1

F2

E

+  [FT1]

1

1U 

UU 

BOO 

O

OFF

DF-D1

DF-R1& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTH

D R

+[DFT1 ]  OFF

211

212

213

214

235

42

231

232

233

234

Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic

To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three schemeswitches for each stage. For stage 1,

[FT1]: This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide themeasuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequencycharacteristic.

Page 25: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 25/215

 

    24    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

F11 / F12 characteristi c Protection selected[FT1]setting F11 F12

O OF(*) - Overfrequency protection only with F11 element

U UF(**) - Underfrequency protection only with F11 element

B OF UF Overfrequency protection with F11 element and

underfrequency protection with F12 elementOO OF OF Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements

UU UF UF Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements

Off OF OF To block frequency protection

(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic

(**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic

[DFT1]: This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. Thefollowing protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.

[DFT1] setting Protection selected

R Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only

D Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only

BOTH Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-changeprotections

Off To block frequency rate-of-change protection

[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 anddetermines the trip command combination of frequency element output andfrequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1]setting and corresponding combinations.

Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic

[Logic1]Setting

Scheme Logic Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )

L1

E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD

L2

E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2

L3

E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)

L4

E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)

E

1

1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E

1

1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

1

1

DFD

EF1

F2

DFR

Page 26: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 26/215

 

    25    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

L5

E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD

The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the devicenames of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and thelogic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.

FRQ2 TRIP

F22

F21 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00S

t   0&

FRQ2 BLOCK 1

Scheme Logic

Selection : [Logic2]

F1

F2

E

+  [FT2]

1

1U 

UU 

BOO 

O

OFF

DF-D2

DF-R2& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTH

D R

+[DFT2 ]  OFF

215

216

217

218

240

43

236

237

238

239

 Figure 2.2.4 FRQ2 Frequency Protection Logic

FRQ3 TRIP

F32

F31 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00S

t   0&

FRQ3 BLOCK 1

Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic3]

F1

F2

E

+  [FT3]1

1U 

UU 

B

OO 

O

OFF

DF-D3

DF-R3& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTH

D R

+[DFT3 ]  OFF

219

220

221

222

245

44

241

242

243

244

 Figure 2.2.5 FRQ3 Frequency Protection Logic

E1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

Page 27: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 27/215

 

    26    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

FRQ4 TRIP

F42

F41 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00S

t   0&

FRQ4 BLOCK 1

Scheme Logic

Selection : [Logic4]

F1

F2

E

+  [FT4]

1

1U 

UU 

BOO 

O

OFF

DF-D4

DF-R4& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTH

D R

+[DFT4 ]  OFF

223

224

225

226

250

45

246

247

248

249

 Figure 2.2.6 FRQ4 Frequency Protection Logic

Setting

The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown inthe table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

F1 (*) 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.00 Hz First frequency element setting

( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 61.00 Hz )F2 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 49.00 Hz Second frequency element setting

( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 59.00 Hz )

DF (**)  0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s Frequency rate-of-change (**)

FVBLK(***)  40 –100 V 1 V 40 V Undervoltage block

TF1 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of first frequency element

TF2 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of second frequency element

FT  Off / O / U / B / OO / UU B Frequency protection selection

DFT  Off / R / D / Both Both Frequency rate-of-change protection selection

Logic  L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5 L1 Scheme logic selection

(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into  for stages 1 to 4 respectively.

(**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR  and DFD.(***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.

Page 28: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 28/215

 

    27    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase tripand alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each protection.

GRE130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.

After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of thetripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a binary input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.

For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open bymonitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relayresetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breakertripping coil current.

OV1 TRIP

OV2 TRIP

UV1 TRIP

UV2 TRIP

ZPS1 TRIP

NPS1 TRIP

FRQ1 TRIP

FRQ2 TRIP

FRQ3 TRIP

FRQ4 TRIP

EN_TRIP1

141

OV1-A TRIP

OV2-A TRIP

UV1-A TRIP

UV2-A TRIP

OV1-B TRIP

OV2-B TRIP

UV1-B TRIP

UV2-B TRIP

OV1-C T RIP

OV2-C T RIP

UV1-C TRIP

UV2-C TRIP

ZPS1_TRIP

GEN_TRIP-A372

G EN. TR IP -N375

1

GEN_TRIP-B373

1

3741 G EN _TR IP-C

 

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

Page 29: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 29/215

 

    28    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

OV3 ALARM

UV3 ALARM

ZPS2 ALARM

NPS2 ALARM

OV3-A ALARM

UV3-A ALARM

OV3-B ALARM

UV3-B ALARM

OV3-C ALARM

UV3-C ALARM

ZPS2 ALARM

GEN_ALARM1380

1 GEN_ALARM-A381

1 GEN_ALARM-B382

1 GEN_ALARM-C383

GEN_ALARM-N384

 

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont ’d)

Page 30: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 30/215

 

    29    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3. Technical Description

3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,status and setting data.

There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined asfollows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”

menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

 ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED Red/Green/

Yellow

Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) Red/Green/

Yellow

User-configurable

(LED2) Red/Green/

Yellow

User-configurable

(LED3) Red/Green/

Yellow

User-configurable

(LED4) Red/Green/Yellow User-configurable

(LED5) Red/Green/

Yellow

User-configurable

(LED6) Red/Green/

Yellow

User-configurable

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmedfor OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can

 be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can beviewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For theoperation, see Section 4.2.1.

Page 31: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 31/215

 

    30    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,

either by pressing the RESET  key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for

‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a

signal is present. The RESET   key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is

controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm

element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..

The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .

The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit,the CB can be controlled using the ○  and |  keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LEDis lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. Whenneither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.

The ▼  key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The ▼  key will

scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when

the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.The ENTER  key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.

The END  key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in

the “MAIN MENU”.

The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to inputsettings or to change settings.

The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel

To a local PC

Liquid crystaldisplay

Light emittingdiodes (LED)

Operation keys

USB type B connector 

Control keys

Light emittingdiodes (LED)

Motor status

Page 32: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 32/215

 

    31    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective

input terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting. 

Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting

Model

410Term. No.

of TB1

1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PN 3PV 3PP

1-2Phase-to-

phasevoltage

Phase-to-neutralvoltage

 A-B phasevoltage

 A-B phasevoltage

 A phasevoltage

 A phasevoltage

 A-B phasevoltage

3-4 --- ---B-C phase

voltageB-C phase

voltageB phasevoltage

B phasevoltage

B-C phasevoltage

5-6 --- --- --- ---C phasevoltage

C phasevoltage

C-A phasevoltage

7-8 Ve Ve --- Ve --- Ve Ve

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411) programmable binary input circuits. Each

 binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion,detection threshold voltage change and function selection.

Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change

The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-upand drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal orinverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closedcontacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to“Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delaytimes can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.

The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting rangevaries depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc ratedmodel is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 andBI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detectionnominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.

The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48Vsupplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configuredfor operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to“Enable”. For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3),then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rateddc supply voltage.

Page 33: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 33/215

 

    32    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage changesettings are as follow:

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm

BITHR1 BI1-2 nominal voltage 48 / 110 / 220

(12 / 24 / 48 )

110

(24)

BITHR2 BI3-6 nominal voltage 110 / 220

(24 / 48)

110

(24)

TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off

BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 bysetting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on theLCD.

()(+)GRE130

[BI2SNS]

"Inv"

  "Norm"

BI1DODBI1PUD

BI2DODBI2PUD

BI6DOD

0 t

BI6PUD

t 0

0 tt 0

0 tt 0

0V

1

[BI6SNS]

"Inv"

  "Norm"

BI1

BI2

BI6

[BI1SNS]

"Inv"

  "Norm"

1

BI1 command

1

BI2 command

1

BI6 command

[BITHR1]

"110V"

  "220V"

"48V"

BI1

BI2

+

+

+

[BITHR2]

"110V"

  "220V"+

+

BI3

BI6

 

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

Function selection

The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For thesetting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

Page 34: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 34/215

 

    33    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic andthe LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.

BI1 COMMAND "ON"

[OV1BLK]

OV1 BLOCK

"ON"

 Alarm4] Alarm 4

"ON"

[OV2BLK]OV2 BLOCK

"ON"

[OV3BLK]OV3 BLOCK

Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic

The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND asshown in Figure 3.2.2.

Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals

Functio ns Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Conditi on

Overvoltage protection1 block OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK Closed to block

Overvoltage protection2 block OV2 BLOCK / OV 2BLK Closed to block

Overvoltage protection3 block OV3 BLOCK / OV 3BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection1 block UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection2 block UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection3 block UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV1 block ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV2 block ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV1 block NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV2 block NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection1 block FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK Closed to blockFrequency protection2 block FRQ2 BLOCK / FRQ2BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection3 block FRQ3 BLOCK / FRQ3BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection4 block FRQ4 BLOCK / FRQ4BLK Closed to block

Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply

State transition for cold load protection, trip

supervision and CB monitoring

CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact

CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contact.

Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication

and latch of binary output relays

Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock

Page 35: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 35/215

 

    34    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Conditi on

Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record

 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.

 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 / Alarm2 Closed to display Alarm 2 text.

 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 / Alarm3 Closed to display Alarm 3 text.

 Alarm 4 Alarm 4 / Alarm4 Closed to display Alarm 4 text.

Remote Open Remote OPEN / RMTOPN CB normally open contact.

Remote Close Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS CB normally close contact.

Control Lock Control Lock / CNTLCK Closed to block

(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF

Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters foreach alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then wheninputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. Alloutputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.

GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relayfail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.

The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. Thesetting is respective for each output relay.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch |  is linked to BO1 and the CB open control

switch ○  is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown inFigure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix Gshows the factory default settings.

Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by thescheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can beset by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal doesnot continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for thetime duration of the input signal.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary

input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is

Page 36: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 36/215

 

    35    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

detected.

 Auxiliary relay

0.00 – 10.00s

"Dl"

"Lat"

S

R

F/F

&

 Signal List

4 GATES

or

4 GATES1

&

 Appendix A1

0 t

+&

Reset button

+

"Dw"RESET

&

TBO

RMTRSTBI1_COMMAND 

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

Settings

The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[RESET] Ins Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix A Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,delayed, dwell or latched.

TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix A

Page 37: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 37/215

 

    36    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it

continuously monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time,and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, whichchecks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. TheGRE130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:

  The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.

  Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

  When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able toidentify the location of the failure.

  Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.

 AC input imbalance moni toring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the healthof the AC input circuit is verified.

  Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting

|Va + V b + Vc| / 3  6.35 (V)

  Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting

|Va + a2V b + aVc| / 3  6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120, a2 = Phase shift

operator of 240 

The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detectionof failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.

The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in thevoltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connectedwith the incorrect phase sequence.

 A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribedrange, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Watchdog Timer

A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that therelay software is running normally.

Power supply Monitoring

The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage iswithin a prescribed range.

Page 38: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 38/215

 

    37    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.3.3 Trip Circui t Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, asdescribed below.

Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binaryinput, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TCFAIL is "1" under healthy conditions.

If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets andTC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV isoutput when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LEDis lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.

Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BIis selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-N" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CBis closed.

GRE130 Circuit Breaker

BinaryInput

CB Aux.Contacts

CB Trip CoilTrip Output+ve

TripSupply

-ve TripSupply

Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervis ion by 1 binary input

TC FAIL 1

[TCSPEN]

&

&

+"ON"

"OPT-ON"

1CB status “closed”

(BI command)

TCSV

0.4s

t 0

TC FAIL

(BI command)

1

0.4s

0 t

Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic

Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers,the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open

and breaker closed conditions.If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a TripCircuit Fail alarm.

Page 39: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 39/215

 

    38    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the twoBIs selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while theCB is closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCSusing 2BIs the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximatelyhalf that of the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be

set at "48" (or "12").GRE130 Circuit Breaker

Binary Input

(BI1)

CB Aux.Contacts

CB Trip CoilTrip Output+veTripSupply

-ve TripSupply

Resistor

Binary Input(BI2)

Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs

3.3.4 Circui t Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). Iftwo binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’,

then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputsare in opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a periodof five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed inan LCD message and event record message respectively.

The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].

 Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm andBIn respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)

1

[CBSMEN]

&

+"ON"

=1CBSV

5.0s

t 0

CB CONT_CLS

CB CONT_OPN1271

Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operatingmechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or anumber of fault current interruptions.

The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time formaintenance of a CB:

Page 40: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 40/215

 

    39    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CBoperating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations

 performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the countexceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

  Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CBoperating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation isslow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the

 phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phaseexceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specifiedinterrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting thescheme switch [OPTAEN].

The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3.5 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LEDindication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items andalarms.

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automaticallywhen a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼  key. The event record messages are shownon the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The settingis used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and

event recording of the failure may not function normally.Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item LCDMessage

LED"IN SERVICE"

LED"ALARM"

LED"Relay fail"

 Alarm record Message

 AC input imbalancemonitoring

Err:V0,Err:V2 (1)

On/Off (2) On (4)V0 err, V2 err,

Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)

 A/D accuracy check

Memory monitoring(1) Off On (4) Relay fail

Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----

Power supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A

Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A

CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A

CB condition monitoringTrip count alarm

 ALM: TPCOUNT

On On Off TP COUNT ALM,Relay fail-A

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.

(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &

BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch

[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".

(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.

(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure isshown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

Page 41: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 41/215

 

    40    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.3.6 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for aslong as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.

  A/D accuracy check

  Memory monitoring

  Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only analarm is output.

3.3.7 Setting

The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in thetable below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[SVCNT]  ALM&BLK/ALM Off  Automatic supervision and

 AC input imbalance supervision

[TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision

[CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision

[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm

TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting

Page 42: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 42/215

 

    41    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.4 Record ing Function

The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recordingDisturbance recording

Counters

These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items arerecorded for one fault:

Date and timeTrip modeOperating phasePower system quantitiesUser configurable initiation

Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.

Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms usingthe relay internal clock.

Trip mode

This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.

Operating phase

This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.

Power sys tem quantities

The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, V b, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, V bc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form ofthe system residual voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f)

3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status

changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their statuschange mode to initiate recording as below.

Page 43: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 43/215

 

    42    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

One of the following four modes is selectable.

Modes Setting

Not to record the event. N

To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O

To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R

To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B

For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"

Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored,the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records(200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PCrefer to the RSM100 instruction manual.

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operatesor a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a startcommand is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.

The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signalsand the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can beassigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording

Model Model 410

 APPL sett ing 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Vph  Vph  Vab  Vab  Va  Va  Vab 

Vbc  Vbc  Vb  Vb  Vbc 

Vc  Vc  Vca  Analog signals

Ve  Ve  Ve  Ve  Ve 

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can bedisplayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM softwareinstruction manual.

The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recordingtimes is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. Theapproximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records storedis shown in Table 3.4.2.

Note:  If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Record ing time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s

50Hz 40 25 15 10 9 7 6

60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 6 5

Page 44: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 44/215

 

    43    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Settings

The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown inthe table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

Time 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s Post-fault recording time

OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection

UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection

ZPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection

Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above isenabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command

[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation

[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation

[ZPS] OFF/ON ON Start by ZPS operation

[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation

Page 45: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 45/215

 

    44    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3.5 Metering Function

The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages,residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

The following quantities are measured and updated every second.- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, V b, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, V bc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f)

- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

-  Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt) 

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary sideas determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well.

For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averagedover a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average valuesare shown on the display screen.

The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1.Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.

Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).

Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity

Model Model 410

 APPL 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Van  

Vbn  

Vcn  

Vph    

Vab          

Vbc          

Vcb      

V1          

V2          

V0      

f               

f max              

f min              

df / dt              

Page 46: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 46/215

 

    45    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4. User Interface

4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring)via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUScommunication via an RS485 port.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu treefor the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light

emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.

LCD

The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the userwith information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but

 pressing ▼   key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER  key will display the main-

menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the END  key when viewing the LCD display at the top

of the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the

 back-light will go off.

LED

There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

 ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED2) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED3) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED4) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED5) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED6) R / G / Y user-configurable

Page 47: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 47/215

 

    46    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command

releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET  key. Other LEDs are lit as

long as a signal is present and the RESET  key is invalid while the signal is maintained.

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as toinput or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

 ▼ , , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enternumerical values and text strings.

  CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

  END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the

display.

  ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

RESET key

Pressing the RESET  key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.

Control keys

The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.

  ○  : Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the ○  keydoes not function.

②  |  : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the |  key does not function 

③  L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.

CAUTION 

The CB close control key |  is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○  is linked to BO2,

when the control function is enabled.

USB connector

The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.

Page 48: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 48/215

 

    47    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

  USB port

  RS485 port

  Optional Communication Unit port

USB port

This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and displayfunctions can be performed.

RS485 port

The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to constructa network communication system.

The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

TB2

TB1

RS485 Port

 

Figure 4.1.1 Location of RS485 Port

Page 49: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 49/215

 

    48    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with theLCD display and operation keys.

Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,

LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation

When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

Press the ▼   key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication","Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latestfault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is somedata. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.

Indication

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

 

Metering

V a n * * . * * V

V b n * * . * * V

V c n * * . * * V

V 0 * * . * * V

V 1 * * . * * V

V 2 * * . * * V

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication,

 press RESET  key for 3 seconds or more.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Page 50: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 50/215

 

    49    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Indication

This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 

Status of element,Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)

Displays in tripping

Latest fault

P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases. 

O V 1 : Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is litas well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.

Press the ▼   to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.

Press the RESET  key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs

(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.

To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

  Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END  or CANCEL  key.

  Press the END  key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.

  Press the ▼   key to display the digest screens.

Page 51: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 51/215

 

    50    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision

E r r : R O M , A / D

 

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LEDlights.

Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"screens.

Press the RESET  key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"

LED remains lit.After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn offautomatically.

If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayedand the "ALARM" LED lights.

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET  key is available. To return to the digest

"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

  Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END  or CANCEL  key.

  Press the

END key to turn off the LCD.

  Press the ▼   key to display the digest screens.

 Alarm Display

Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

  * * * * * * * * : A L M 1

 

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (Forsetting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.

Press the ▼  to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"screens.

To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET   key. Clearing is available after displaying up to

ALM4.

Page 52: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 52/215

 

    51    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus,"Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy,see Appendix D.

Record  Fault

Event

Disturbance

Counter

Status Metering

Binary I/O

Relay element

Time sync.

Clock adjust.

LCD contrast

Set. (view) Version

Description

Comms

Record

Status

Protection

Binary I/P

Binary O/P

LED

Control

Frequency

Set. (change) Password

Description

Comms

Record

Status

Protection

Binary I/P

Binary O/PLED

Control

Frequency

Control Password(Ctrl)

Local / Remote

CB close/open

Test Password(test)

Switch

Binary O/P

Menu

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

Page 53: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 53/215

 

    52    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Record

In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as tripcount can be accessed.

Status

The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relaymeasuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock andLCD contrast.

Set. (view)

The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate forRSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputsand configurable LEDs.

Set. (change)

The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay addressand baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Control

The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position, the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R  is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the

CB close/open position, the CB control keys○

  and|

 are enabled. Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Test

The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.

When the LCD is off, press the ENTER  key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then

 proceed to the relay menus. 

M A I N M E N U

> R e c o r d

  S t a t u s

  S e t . ( v i e w )

  S e t . ( c h a n g e )

  C o n t r o l

  T e s t

 

To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the  ▼  key to

turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER  key.Press the END  key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

Page 54: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 54/215

 

    53    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.The 8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayedon the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on thewindow, use the ▼   and keys.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _ 

> T r i p 1

  O f f / O n

  B I 1

  O f f / O n

  O V 1

  O f f / O n

  U V 1

  O f f / O n

  Z P S 1

  O f F / O n

  N P S 1

  O f f / O n

  F R Q 1

  O f f / O n

 

To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix

D press the END  or CANCEL  key.

The CANCEL  key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully

 because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and thenmove to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records andcounts such as trip count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:

  Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER  key.

  Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d

Page 55: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 55/215

 

    54    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

> F a u l t

  E v e n t

  D i s t u r b a n c e

  C o u n t e r

 

  Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

/ 2 F a u l t

>  V i e w r e c o r d

  C l e a r

 

  Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay fromthe top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 F a u l t

 

> ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 1 0

  ♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

  ♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

  Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and ▼   keys and press

the ENTER  key to display the details of the fault record.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼  keys.

/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1

P r e f a u l t v a l u e s

 V a n * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V b n * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V c n * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V a b * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V b c * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V c a * * . * * k V

Page 56: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 56/215

 

    55    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

* * * . * °

 V p h * * . * * k V

 V 0 * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V 1 * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

 V 2 * * . * * k V

  * * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

 

Note:  Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase

angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.

Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input

to the relay

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

  Open the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

  Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the END  (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is notdisplayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

  Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER  key.

  Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 2 E v e n t

>  V i e w r e c o r d

  C l e a r

 

  Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 E v e n t

Page 57: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 57/215

 

    56    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 1 0 0

O V 1 ・   A t r i P O n

2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 0 9 9

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O N2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 9 8

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

 

2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 3

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 2

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

2 4 / A  u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 1

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

The time is displayed by pressing the key.

/ 3 E v e n t

 

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

 

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 0 0

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0

O V 1 ・   A t r i p O n

Press the key to return the screen with date.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼  keys.

To clear all the event records, do the following:

  Open the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

  Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 58: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 58/215

 

    57    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the END  (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays onlythe recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in thefollowing sequence.

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.

  Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER  key.

  Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e

>  V i e w r e c o r d

  C l e a r

 

  Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top innew-to-old sequence.

/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e

 

♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼  keys.

To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

  Open the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

  Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 59: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 59/215

 

    58    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the END  (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

  Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER  key.

  Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 2 C o u n t e r  

>  V i e w c o u n t e r  

C l e a r T r i p s  

C l e a r T r i p s A   (*)

  C l e a r T r i p s B (*)

  C l e a r T r i p s C (*)

 

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions

are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

  Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r  

T r i p s * * * * * *  

T r i p s A * * * * * * (*)

T r i p s B * * * * * * (*)

T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)

 

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions

are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and ▼  keys.

To clear each count, do the following:

  Open the "Record" sub-menu.

  Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.  Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 60: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 60/215

 

    59    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

C l e a r T r i p s ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the END  (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

Page 61: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 61/215

 

    60    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.4 Status Display

From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronisation source

Status of clock adjustment

Status of LCD contrast

The data is updated every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

  Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

/ 1 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

  B i n a r y I / O

  R e l a y e l e m e n t

  T i m e s y n c .

  C l o c k a d j u s t .

  L C D c o n t r a s t

  .

  Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 4 M e t e r i n g

 V a n * * . * * k V APPL = 3PP

  * * * . * °

 V b n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V c n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V a b * * . * * k V APPL = 3PN

  * * * . * °

 V b c * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V c a * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V p h * * . * * k V APPL = 1PP

 

Page 62: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 62/215

 

    61    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 V 0 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V 1 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

 V 2 * * . * * k V* * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f m a x * * . * * H z

f m i n * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

f / t x * * . * * H z / s

f / t n * * . * * H z / s

Note:  Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase

angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.

Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input

to the relay

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:

  Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

  Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

 

The display format is shown below.

[            ]

Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6

Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" atthe photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.

Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of theoutput relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".

FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.

Page 63: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 63/215

 

    62    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:

  Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

  Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.

/ 2 R y e l e m e n t

 A N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

 A B O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

 A N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

 A B U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

 V Z P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

 V N P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

F R Q 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]

The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.

[        ]

 AN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A phase OV elements

BN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B phase OV element

CN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C phase OV element

 AB OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A to B phase OV elements

BC OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B to C phase OV element

CA OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C to A phase OV element

OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 OV elements

 AN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A phase UV element

BN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B phase UV element

CN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C phase UV element

 AB UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A to B phase UV element

BC UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B to C phase UV element

CA UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C to A phase UV element

ZPS1-2 ZPS1 ZPS2 Zero Phase Sequence element

NPS1-2 NPS1 NPS2 - - Negative Phase Sequence element

FRQ1-4 FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 Frequency element

Page 64: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 64/215

 

    63    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the elementis in operation.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binaryinput signal clock or Modbus. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) orinactive (=Inact.) and with which clock the relay is synchronised , do the following:

  Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

  Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.

/ 2 T i m e s y n c .

> B I : A C T .

  M o d b u s : I n a c t .

 

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked sourceclock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

 Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more since the last detection, the

status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

  Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

  Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.

/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 0

  0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]

> M i n u t e

  0 _ 

  H o u r

  0 _ 

  D a y2 6 _ 

  M o n t h

  8 _ 

  Y e a r

  2 0 1 0 _  

 

Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock isrunning locally. When [BI] or [M] is active, the adjustment is invalid.

  Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER  key. For details on how to enter

a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

Page 65: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 65/215

 

    64    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Press the END  key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to

the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END  is pressed, "**** Error ****" is

displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing

the CANCEL  key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Cont rast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:

  Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

  Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen. 

/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t

■ ■ ■ ■

 

  Press the or   key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by

 pressing the key and thicker by pressing the  key.

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication.

Record setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

Page 66: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 66/215

 

    65    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.

  Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.

/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )

> V e r s i o n

  D e s c r i p t i o n

  C o m m s

  R e c o r d

  S t a t u s

  P r o t e c t i o n

  B i n a r y I / P

  B i n a r y O / P

  L E D

  C o n t r o l

 

  Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n

> R e l a y t y p e

  S o f t w a r e .

 

  Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10) 

G R E 1 3 0 - 4 1 1 A - 1 0

  - 1 0

  Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.

G S 3 E M 1 - 0 3 - A  

 

Page 67: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 67/215

 

    66    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" ,"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)"sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Relay address and baud rate for communication function

Recording setting

Status setting

Protection settingBinary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION 

Modification of settings :  Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group","scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist betweenthe settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessarysettings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.

Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it isrecommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "activegroup" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:

- To enter a selected item

- To enter a text string

- To enter numerical values

To enter a selected item

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.

The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and ▼  

keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and▼

 keys.

Page 68: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 68/215

 

    67    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )

> P a s s w o r d

  D e s c r i p t i o n

  C o m m s

  R e c o r d  S t a t u s

  P r o t e c t i o n

  B i n a r y I / P

  B i n a r y O / P

  L E D

  C o n t r o l

  F r e q u e n c y

 

  Move the cursor to a setting item.

  Press the ENTER  key.

To enter a text str ing

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e

  D e s c r i p t i o n

 

To select a character, use keys ▼  ,  , and to move the blinking cursor down, up, left

and right. "" and "" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximumof 22 characters can be entered.

 _

 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f  

g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

  Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER   key.

  Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

  Press the ENTER  key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.

Page 69: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 69/215

 

    68    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Press the END  key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

  Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER  key and enter the new

character.  Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL  key and restart the entry from the

 beginning.

To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. Thecursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and ▼  keys.

If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and ▼  keys.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

  T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

  O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

  U V 6 0 . 0 V

  Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

  N P S 2 0 . 0 V

 

  Move the cursor to a setting line.

  Press the or key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing

the or key. ,

  Press the ENTER  key to enter the value.

  After completing the setting on the screen, press the END  key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.

  If it is before pressing the ENTER    key, press the CANCEL  key and enter the new

numerical value.  If it is after pressing the ENTER  key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by

 pressing the and ▼  keys and enter the new numerical value.

Note: If the CANCEL  key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER   key, all

the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper

one. 

To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER  key, the new settings

are not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings,take the following steps.

Page 70: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 70/215

 

    69    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Press the END  key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen

shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the"Set. (change)" sub-menu.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER  key to commence operation using the new

settings, or press the CANCEL  key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen

will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL  key to cancel entries

that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password

For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:

  Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.

  Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

  Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER  key.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  Press the END  key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

  Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change

Page 71: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 71/215

 

    70    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

screens.

If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press CANCEL  and RESET  keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.

The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the passwordagain.

4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.

  Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.

  Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e

  D e s c r i p t i o n

 

  To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.  To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.

  To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.

 _

 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f  

g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

Page 72: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 72/215

 

    71    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Enter the text string.

4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:

  Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.

  Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s

>  A d d r .

  S w i t c h

 

  Select "Addr." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.

/ 3 C o m m s

 A d d r . _ 

> A d d r . 1

 

  Enter the relay address number on RSM or Modbus and press the ENTER  key.

CAUTION  Do not overlap the relay address number.

Setting for MODBUS communication

  Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baudrate), etc., of the Modbus and other communication.

/ 3 S w i t c h

R S 4 8 5 _  

> R S 4 8 5 0

  9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2

 

  Select the number and press the ENTER  key.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording func tion

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

  Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)"screen.

  Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.

Page 73: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 73/215

 

    72    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

/ 2 R e c o r d

> E v e n t

  D i s t u r b a n c e

  C o u n t e r

 

Setting the event recording

  Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 3 E v e n t

B I 1 c o m m . _  > B I 1 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

  B I 2 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

  B I 3 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

  B I 4 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

  B I 5 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

  B I 6 c o m m . 3

  N / O / R / B

 

  Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and

 press the ENTER  key.

Setting the disturbance recording

  Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e

> T i m e / S t a r t e r

  S c h e m e s w

  B i n a r y s i g .

 

Page 74: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 74/215

 

    73    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

  T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

  O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

  U V 6 0 . 0 V

  Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

  N P S 2 0 . 0 V

  Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:

  Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _ 

> T r i p 1

  O f f / O n

  B I 1

  O f f / O n

  O V 1

  O f f / O n

  U V 1

  O f f / O n

  Z P S 1

  O f f / O n

  N P S 1

  O f f / O n

  F R Q 1

  O f f / O n

  D F R Q 1

  O f f / O n

  Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:

  Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.

/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .

S I G 1 _ 

> S I G 1 5 1

  S I G 2 5 1

  S I G 3 5 1

  S I G 4 5 1 

Page 75: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 75/215

 

    74    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

S I G 3 1 5 1

  S I G 3 2 5 1

 

  Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.

Setting the counter

  Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 3 C o u n t e r

> S c h e m e s w

  A l a r m s e t

 

To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:

  Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T C S P E N _  

> T C S P E N 1

  O f f / O n / O p t - O n

  C B S M E N 1

  O f f / O n

  T C A E N 1

  O f f / O n

  Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set the threshold setting, do the following:

  Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.

/ 4 A l a r m s e t

T C A L M _  

> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0

 

  Enter the threshold settings.

Page 76: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 76/215

 

    75    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

  T i m e s y n c .

 

Setting the metering

  Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

D i s p l a y _  > D i s p l a y 1

  P r i / S e c

 

  Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).

Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.

Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus.This is selected by setting as follows.

  Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c . _  

> T i m e s y n c . 1

  O f f / B I / M o d b u s

 

  Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER   key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.

Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.

Enter 2(=Modbus) to be synchronised with the Modbus.

Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in the "Status"

sub-menu.

If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because the event recordswill rapidly become full . (See Section 4.2.6.5.)

If it set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.

Page 77: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 77/215

 

    76    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in theoperation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do thefollowing:

  Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n

> C h a n g e a c t . g p .

  C h a n g e s e t

  C o p y g p .

 

Changing the active group

  Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.

/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .

  g p .

 A c t i v e g p . _ 

> A c t i v e g p . 1

 

  Enter the group number and press the ENTER  key.

Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For thedefault values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:

  Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.

/ 3 A c t g p . = 1

> C o m m o n

  G r o u p 1

  G r o u p 2

 

Page 78: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 78/215

 

    77    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Changing the Common settings

  Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the

ENTER  key.

/ 4 C o m m o n A P P L _ 

> A P P L 1

  1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P / 2 P Z

  3 P N / 3 P V / 3 P P

  A O L E D

  O f f / O n

 

<APPL>

  Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage

input state and press the ENTER  key.

 AOLED 

This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.

  Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press theENTER  key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

Page 79: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 79/215

 

    78    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Changing the Group settings

  Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER  

key.

/ 4 G r o u p *

> P a r a m e t e r

  T r i p

 

Setting the parameter

Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:

  Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.

/ 5 P a r a m e t e r

> L i n e n a m e

  V T r a t i o

 

  Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

  Enter the line name as a text string and press the END  key.

  Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.

/ 6 V T r a t i o

P V T _ 

> P V T 1 0 0

  R V T 1 0 0

 

  Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER  key.

Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.

  Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/ 5 T r i p

> S c h e m e s w

  P r o t . e l e m e n t

 

Page 80: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 80/215

 

    79    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting the scheme switch

  Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 6 S c h e m e s w

> A p p l i c a t i o n

  O V p r o t .

  U V p r o t .

  Z P S p r o t .

  N P S p r o t .

  F R Q p r o t .

 

Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.

  Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.

/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n

S V C N T _  

> S V C N T 1

  A L & B L K / A L M

 

SVCNT Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automaticsupervision and AC input imbalance supervision.

  Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the

ENTER   key.

Setting the OV protection

The settings for the OV protection are as follows:

  Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .

O V 1 E N _  

> O V 1 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I M D T / C

  O V 2 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I M D T / C

  O V 3 E N 1

  O f f / O n

 OV1EN, <OV2EN>

To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.

  Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER  key. If

disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

Page 81: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 81/215

 

    80    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

OV3EN 

  Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER  key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0

(=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the UV protection

The settings for the UV protection are as follows:

  Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V p r o t .

U V 1 E N _  

> U V 1 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I M D T / C

  U V 2 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I M D T / C

  U V 3 E N 1

  O f f / O n

  V B L K E N 1

  O f f / O n

 

UV1EN

, <UV2EN>

To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.

  Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER  key. If

disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

UV3EN 

  Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER  key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0

(=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

Page 82: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 82/215

 

    81    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

VBLKEN 

  Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER  key. If disabling the UV

 blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

Setting the ZPS Protection

The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:

  Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t

Z P S 1 E N _  

> Z P S 1 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I D M T / C

  Z P S 2 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I D M T / C

 

ZPS1EN

, <ZPS2EN>

To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

  Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER  key. If

disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the NPS protection

The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:

  Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t

N P S 1 E N _  

> N P S 1 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I D M T / C

  N P S 2 E N 1

  O f f / D T / I D M T / C

 

Page 83: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 83/215

 

    82    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

NPS1EN, <NPS2EN>

To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

  Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER  key. If

disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the FRQ protection

The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:

  Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t

F T 1 _ 

> F T 1 1

  O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

  D F T 1 1

  O f f / R / D / B o t h

  L o g i c 1

  L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

  F T 2 0

  O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

  D F T 2 0

  O f f / R / D / B o t h

  L o g i c 2

  L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

  F T 3 0

  O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

  D F T 3 0

  O f f / R / D / B o t h

  L o g i c 3

  L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

  F T 4 0

  O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

  D F T 4 0

  O f f / R / D / B o t h

  L o g i c 4  L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

Page 84: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 84/215

 

    83    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>

FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.

  Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER   key.

Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.

Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is notused

Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element forunderfrequency protection.

Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.

Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.

<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>

DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.

  Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER  key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.

Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.

<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>

Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protectionand the frequency rate-of-change protection.

  Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER  key.

Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.

Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.

  Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.

/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

> O V p r o t .

  U V p r o t .

  Z P S p r o t

  N P S p r o t

  F R Q p r o t

 

Page 85: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 85/215

 

    84    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting the OV elements

  Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .  

O V 1 _ V

> O V 1 1 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting. 

T O V 1 1 . 0 0 S OV1 Definite time delay. 

T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay. 

O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 

O V 2 1 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting. 

T O V 2 1 . 0 0 S OV2 Definite time delay. 

T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay. 

O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 

O V 3 1 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting. 

T O V 3 1 . 0 0 S OV3 Definite time delay. 

O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

O V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

O V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

  Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the UV elements

  Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.

Page 86: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 86/215

 

    85    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

/ 7 U V p r o t .  

U V 1 _ V

> U V 1 5 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting. 

T U V 1 0 . 0 5 S UV1 Definite time delay. 

T U V 1 M 0 . 0 5 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T U V 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay. 

U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting. 

T U V 2 0 . 0 5 S UV2 Definite time delay. 

T U V 2 M 0 . 0 5 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T U V 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay. 

U V 3 1 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting. 

T U V 3 1 . 0 0 S UV3 Definite time delay. 

 V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold

U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

U V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

U V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

  Enter the numerical value and press the

ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the ZPS elements

  Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t  

Z P S 1 _ V

> Z P S 1 5 . 0 V ZPS1 Threshold setting. 

T Z P S 1 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 1 Definite time delay. 

T Z P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T Z P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay. 

Z P S 2 4 0 . 0 V ZPS 2 Threshold setting. 

T Z P S 2 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 2 Definite time delay. 

Page 87: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 87/215

 

    86    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

T Z P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T Z P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay. 

Z P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

Z P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

Z P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

  Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the NPS protection elements

  Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t

N P S 1 _ V

> N P S 1 5 . 0 V NPS1 Threshold setting. 

T N P S 1 0 . 0 5 S NPS 1 Definite time delay. 

T N P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T N P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 1 Definite time reset delay.  

N P S 2 4 0 . 0 V NPS 2 Threshold setting. 

T N P S 2 0 . 0 5 S NPS 2 Definite time delay. 

T N P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting. 

T N P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 2 Definite time reset delay.  

N P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

N P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting 

N P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

  Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER   key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 88: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 88/215

 

    87    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Press the ENTER   (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the FRQ elements

  Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t

F 1 1 _ H z

> F 1 1 5 . 0 H z F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting. 

T F 1 1 0 . 0 5 S F11 Definite time delay. 

F 1 2 5 . 0 H z F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting. 

T F 1 2 0 . 0 5 S F12 Definite time delay. 

D F 1 0 . 5 H z / s DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.  

F 2 1 5 . 0 H z F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting. 

T F 2 1 0 . 0 5 S F21 Definite time delay. 

F 2 2 5 . 0 H z F22 for FRQ2 Threshold setting. 

T F 2 2 0 . 0 5 S F22 Definite time delay. 

D F 2 0 . 5 H z / s DF2 for FRQ2 of DFRQ2 Threshold setting.  F 3 1 5 . 0 H z F31 for FRQ3 threshold setting. 

T F 3 1 0 . 0 5 S F31 Definite time delay. 

F 3 2 5 . 0 H z F32 for FRQ3 Threshold setting. 

T F 3 2 0 . 0 5 S F32 Definite time delay. 

D F 3 0 . 5 H z / s DF3 for FRQ3 of DFRQ3 Threshold setting.  

F 4 1 5 . 0 H z F41 for FRQ4 threshold setting. 

T F 4 1 0 . 0 5 S F41 Definite time delay. 

F 4 2 5 . 0 H z F42 for FRQ4 Threshold setting. 

T F 4 2 0 . 0 5 S F42 Definite time delay. 

D F 4 0 . 5 H z / s DF4 for FRQ4 of DFRQ4 Threshold setting.  

  Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

Page 89: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 89/215

 

    88    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Press the ENTER  (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting group copy

To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do thefollowing:

  Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.

/ 3 C o p y  A t o B

> A _ 

  B _ 

 

  Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the

ENTER  key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.

  Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / P

> B I S t a t u s

  B I 1

B I 2

B I 3

B I 4

B I 5

B I 6

 A l a r m 1 T e x t

  A l a r m 2 T e x t

  A l a r m 3 T e x t

  A l a r m 4 T e x t

 

Setting Binary Input Status

The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V,48V, 110V and 220V are supported.

BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)

BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)

Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2

Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.

The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage

Page 90: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 90/215

 

    89    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

supply rating of the relay models.To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:

  Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.

/ 3 B I S t a t u s

B I T H R 1

> B I T H R 1 1

  4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0

  B I T H R 2 0

  1 1 0 / 2 2 0

 

BITHR1 

To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.

  Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER   key.

BITHR2

 

To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.

  Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER   key.

Selection of Binary Input

  Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER  key to display the "BI" screen.

/ 3 B I 1

> T i m e r s

  F u n c t i o n s

 

Setting Alarm Text

If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.

  Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER  key to display the text input screen.

 _

 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f  

g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

  Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.

Page 91: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 91/215

 

    90    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

After setting, press the ENTER  key to display the "BI" screen.

Setting timers

  Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.

/ 4 T i m e r s

B I 1 P U D _ s

> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting 

B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting

  Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to return to the "BI" screen.

Setting Functions

  Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n

B I 1 S N S _  

> B I 1 S N S 0

  N o r m / I n v

  B I 1 S G S 0

  O f f / 1 / 2

  O V 1 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  O V 2 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  O V 3 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  U V 1 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  U V 2 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  U V 3 B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  Z P S B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  N P S B L K 0

  O f f / O n

  F R Q B L K 0

  O f f / O n

 

Page 92: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 92/215

 

    91    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER  key.

  After setting, press the END  key to return to the "BI" screen.

BI1SNS 

To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.

  Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER   key.

BI1SGS 

To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.

  Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER   key.

Others 

  Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER   key. If not setting the function, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER   key.

  After setting, press the END  key to return to the "BI" screen.

4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Availablesignals are listed in Appendix C.

It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION 

When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by

 pressing the RESET  key for more than 3 seconds.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay

  Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

Note:  Setting is required for all binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to

logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

Page 93: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 93/215

 

    92    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER  key to display the "BO"

screen.

/ 3 B O  

> L o g i c / R e s e t

  F u n c t i o n s

 

Setting the logic gate type and timer

  Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _  

> L o g i c 0

  O R / A N D

  R e s e t 0

  I n s / D I / D w / L a t

 

  Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing

and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "BO" screen.

Note:  To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

 Assign ing s ignals

  Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _ 

> I n ♯ 1 - - -

  I n ♯ 2 - - -  I n ♯ 3 - - -

  I n ♯ 4 - - -

  T B O 0 . 2 0 s

 

  Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to eachsignal referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 173 (signal names:"BO1 OP" to "BO4 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.

Note:  If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Page 94: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 94/215

 

    93    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

CAUTION 

The CB close control key |  is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○  is linked to BO2,when the control function is enabled.

4.2.6.10 LEDs

Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status ofwhich can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can be assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION 

When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by

 pressing the RESET  key for more than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs

  Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

  V i r t u a l L E D

 

Selection of real LEDs

  Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

  L E D 2

  L E D 3

  L E D 4

  L E D 5

  L E D 6

  C B C L O S E D

Note:  The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates#1 to #4 in assigning signals.

  Select the LED number and press the ENTER  key to display the "LED" screen.

/ 4 L E D  

> L o g i c / R e s e t

  F u n c t i o n s

  L E D C o l o r

 

Page 95: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 95/215

 

    94    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting the logic gate type and reset type

  Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _  

> L o g i c 0

  O R / A N D

  R e s e t 0

  I n s t / L a t c h

 

  Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "LED" screen.

Note:  To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

 Assign ing s ignals

  Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

I n # 1 _  

> I n # 1 - - -

  I n # 2 - - -

  I n # 3 - - -

  I n # 4 - - -

 

  Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to eachsignal referring to Appendix A.

Note:  If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

  Press the END  key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Setting the LED color

  Select "LED color" on the "LED " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the"LED color" screen.

/ 5 L E D C o l o r

C o l o r _  

> C o l o r 0

  R / G / Y  

 

Page 96: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 96/215

 

    95    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.

  Press the END  key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.

Selection of vi rtual LEDs  Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D

> I N D 1

  I N D 2

 

  Select the IND number and press the ENTER  key to display the "IND" screen.

/ 4 I N D 1

> R e s e t

  F u n c t i o n s

 

Setting the reset timing

  Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.

/ 5 R e s e tR e s e t _  

> R e s e t 0

  I n s t / L a t c h

 

  Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "IND" screen.

Note:  To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

 Assign ing s ignals

  Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F n c t i o n s

B I T 1 _ 

> B I T 1 - - -

  B I T 2 - - -

  B I T 3 - - -

  B I T 4 - - -

  B I T 5 - - -

  B I T 6 - - -

Page 97: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 97/215

 

    96    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

B I T 7 - - -

  B I T 8 - - -

  Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring toAppendix A.

Note:  If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

  Press the END  key to return to the "IND" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.11 Control

The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.

The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command withinterlock signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.

To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:

  Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 2 C o n t r o l

C o n t r o l _  

> C o n t r o l 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  I n t e r l o c k 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 

  Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and

 press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and

 press the ENTER  key.

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are notlit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed. 

4.2.6.12 Frequency

Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.

To change the system frequency, do the following:

  Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.

/ 2 F r e q u e n c y

F r e q u e n c y _  

> F r e q u e n c y 0

  5 0 H z / 6 0 H z

 

  Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the

Page 98: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 98/215

 

    97    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

ENTER  key.

CAUTION 

When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable thesetting change.

4.2.7 Control

The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panelkeys - ○  , |  and L/R . 

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are notlit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed. 

4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Contro l

The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.

  Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

  L o c a l / R e m o t e

  C B c l o s e / o p e n

 

  Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

  P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

> L o c a l / R e m o t e

  C B c l o s e / o p e n

 

  The L/R   key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.

4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control

The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.

  Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

  P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

  L o c a l / R e m o t e

> C B c l o s e / o p e n

 

  The |  and ○  keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.

Page 99: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 99/215

 

    98    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2.7.3 Password

For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:

  Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

  Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

  Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER  key.

C o n t r o l

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

C o n t r o l

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  Press the END  key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.

If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" isdisplayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control"sub-menu screens.

C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.

Page 100: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 100/215

 

    99    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

If you forget the password

Press the CANCEL  and RESET  keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.

The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.8 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function andforced operation of binary outputs.

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs

during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.

4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are beingmonitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LEDand LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

  Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/ 1 T e s t

> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )

  S w i t c h

  B i n a r y O / P

 

  Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t h

 A . M . F _ 

> A . M . F 1

  O f f / O n

  U V T S T 0

  O f f / O n

 

  Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the

ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external

Page 101: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 101/215

 

    100    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.

  Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCDdisplays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _ 

> B O 1 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 2 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 3 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 4 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  F A I L 0  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 

  Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER   key to forcibly operate the output relays.

  After completing the entries, press the END  key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown

 below.

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Keep pressing the ENTER   key to operate the assigned output relays.

  Release pressing the ENTER   key to reset the operation.

  Press the CANCEL  key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

4.2.8.3 Password

For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:

  Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.  Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

  Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER  key.

T e s t

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

Page 102: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 102/215

 

    101    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

T e s t

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

  Press the END  key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting changescreens.

If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" isdisplayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test"sub-menu screens.

T e s t

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

 

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in thesame way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press the CANCEL  and RESET  keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.

The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the passwordagain.

Page 103: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 103/215

 

    102    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available inaddition to the items available on the LCD screen.

  Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display

  Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span

  Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span

  Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span

For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Modbus Interface

GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the

relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement andstatus data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)

  Measurement data: current

  Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.

  Setting data

  Remote CB operation: Open / Close

  Time setting / synchronization

The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. SeeSection 4.2.6.4.

4.5 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

  Event records

  Disturbance records

  Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary

time standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.

The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot expressyear-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number ofmilliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is inputevery second.

Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. Whenthe trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie thenumber of seconds is incremented).

Page 104: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 104/215

 

    103    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PCINTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendarclock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with anexternal time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

4.6 Special Mode

The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.

  LCD contrast adjustment mode

  Light check mode

LCD contrast adjustment mode

When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment forthe LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens,do the following:

 Press ▼  and ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustmentmode.

L C D C o n t r a s t

  Press the or   key to adjust the contrast. 

Freeze mode

CAUTION This mode is relay function all freeze. Do not shift this mode.

  Press with and CANCEL  already pressed , to shift Freeze boot mode.

  Then the LEDs of "In service", "TRIP", "ALARM", "Relay fail" and "LED1-6" are lit whilethe LCD screen and other programs are frozen.

When in this mode, protection functions are NOT available.

corrected to (n+1) sec

500ms

n sec (n+1) sec

corrected to n sec

t

Page 105: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 105/215

 

    104    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

LCD and LED check mode

To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.

  Press key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.

  While pressing key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen. The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.

  Release key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode. 

IN SERVICE

TRIP

ALARM

RELAY FAIL

CB CLOSED CB OPEN LOCAL REMOTE

User configurable

LEDs (LED1-6)

Page 106: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 106/215

 

    105    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

5. Installation

5.1 Receipt of Relays

When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check fordamage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting

The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.

Appendix E shows the case outlines.

         1         4

513

         5

127

117

 

Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit

The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screwsincluded with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screwstogether with some spacing washers should be used.

5.2.1 Flush Mounting

For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;

・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.

・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.

・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.

Do not tighten the screws too tightly.

Page 107: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 107/215

 

    106    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

         1         6         0

143 +0.2

-0.2

       +        0  .        2

     -        0  .        2

 

Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out

Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment k it

Page 108: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 108/215

 

    107    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment ki ts

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION 

Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules arevery sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand

volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuitscan cause serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliabilityof the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.Do not expose them to risk of damage.

The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed andmanufactured.

CAUTION   Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same

electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

  Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.

  Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.

It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carriedout in a Special Handling Area.

5.5 External ConnectionsExternal connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.

Page 109: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 109/215

 

    108    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and theconjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.

Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuitsfunction when the DC power is supplied.

User interfacesBinary input circuits and output circuitsAC input circuits

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.

Measuring elements

Metering and recordingConjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other externalequipment.

The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity checkTripping circuit test

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION 

  When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attachthe cover provided for the terminal block .

  Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

Page 110: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 110/215

 

    109    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing

CAUTION 

  When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.

  Before turning the power on, check the following:- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.

- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.

  Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.

  If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

Page 111: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 111/215

 

    110    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source1 Three-phase voltage source1 power supply3 Phase angle meter3 AC ammeter3 AC voltmeter1 Time counter, precision timer1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the

default settings.

For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.

Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, theinternal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’sspecification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, andauxiliary supply voltage rating.

Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100software is required to run the PC. 

For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

Page 112: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 112/215

 

    111    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current andvoltage sources are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD ・LED display

  Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is litgreen.

Note:  If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.

  Press key for 3 seconds or longer  and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and

that all LEDs are lit.

Operation keys

  Press the ENTER  key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN

MENU" screen. Press the END  key to turn off the LCD.

  Press the ENTER  key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN

MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.

6.4.2 Binary Input Circui ts

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

GRE130

-13TB2

-14

powersupply

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

BI6

-13

- 14

-12

TB1

- 19

-20

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circu it

Page 113: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 113/215

 

    112    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

 

  Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal blockTB2.Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (Fordetails of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals atonce.

6.4.3 Binary Output Circui ts

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay driversand output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The outputcontact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.

  Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displaysthe name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _ 

> B O 1 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 2 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 3 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 4 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  F A I L 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 

  Enter 1 and press the ENTER  key.

  After completing the entries, press the END  key. The LCD will display the screen shown

 below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.

Page 114: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 114/215

 

    113    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Keep pressing the ENTER  key to operate the output relays forcibly.

  Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

  Stop pressing the ENTER  key to reset the operation

6.4.4 AC Input Circui ts

This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying thatthe values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.

V A

VB

C

TB1

powersupply

-13

-14

12

TB1

GRE130

-1

-2

-3

Three-phasevoltagesource

V

-4

-5

-6

Single-phasevoltagesource

-7

-8

V

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit

To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen

If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"sub-menu.

"Set. (change)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen

Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

  Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen

  Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.

Page 115: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 115/215

 

    114    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.5 Function Test

CAUTION

The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overallcharacteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurableLED or a binary output relay.

Note:  The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for

logic level "0".

CAUTION 

  Use test equipment with more than 1 k  of internal impedance when observing the outputsignal at the monitoring jacks.

  Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.

  Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.

In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phaseelement is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.

 Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or Bdoes not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, ifrequired, should be measured at a binary output relay.

 Assign ing s ignals to LEDs

  Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

  V i r t u a l L E D

 

  Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen./ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

  L E D 2

  L E D 3

  L E D 4

  L E D 5

  L E D 6

  C B C L O S E D

Note:  The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates

#1 to #4 in assigning signals.

Page 116: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 116/215

 

    115    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

  Select the LED number and press the ENTER  key to display the "LED" screen.

/ 4 L E D  

> L o g i c / R e s e t

  F u n c t i o n s

  L E D C o l o r

 

  Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _  

> L o g i c 0

  O R / A N D

  R e s e t 0

  I n s t / L a t c h

 

  Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "LED" screen.

  Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _ 

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _  

  I n ♯ 2 _ _ _  

  I n ♯ 3 _ _ _  

  I n ♯ 4 _ _ _  

 

  Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,and assign other gates to “0”.

 Assigning s ignals to Binary Output Relays

  Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

Page 117: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 117/215

 

    116    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Note:  The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,

enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

  Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER  key to display the "BO"

screen.

/ 3 B O  

> L o g i c / R e s e t

  F u n c t i o n s

 

  Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _  

> L o g i c 0

  O R / A N D

  R e s e t 0

  I n s / D l / D w / L a t

 

  Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER  key.

  Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key to return to the "BO" screen.

  Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _ 

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _ 

  I n ♯ 2 _ _ _ 

  I n ♯ 3 _ _ _ 

  I n ♯ 4 _ _ _ 

  T B O 0 . 2 0 s

 

  Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix Aand assign other gates to “0”.

Page 118: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 118/215

 

    117    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No. Element Signal No.

OV1 101 UV1 122

OV2 108 UV2 126

OV3 115 UV3 130

ZPS1 134 ZPS2 135

  Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and

 press the ENTER  key.

  Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the valueat which the element operates.Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2

  Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.

  Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within  5% of the setting.

Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3

  Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.

  Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within  5% of the setting.

Operating t ime check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves

  Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure theoperating time.

  Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.

TB 1 

- 13

 

- 14

-12

 

GRE13 

power  supply 

 

 

V  TB 1  

 

Variable - 

Voltage source 

-1 

-2 

(  ) :Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

Page 119: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 119/215

 

    118    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvo ltage element NPS1 and NPS2

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.

Three-phaseVoltagesource

TB1 -1 

-3 

-6 

-5

Va 

Vb 

GRE130 

-13 

-14 

-12

TB1powersupply

 

 

Vc 

V

VN

 

Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No.

NPS1 136

NPS2 137

  Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by

increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve

  Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure theoperating time.

  Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.

Page 120: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 120/215

 

    119    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.

B1 -13

-14

GRE130

powersupply

-1

-2

V B1f

Variable-

Frequency /Voltage source

-12

 

Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit

Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No.

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

FVBLK

251

252

253

254

255

Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4

 Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme

switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element

 before testing .

  Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.

For the overfrequency characteristic,

  Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that themeasured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.

For the underfrequency characteristics,

  Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check thatthe measured value is within  0.005Hz of the setting.

Undervoltage block test, FVBLK

  Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.

  Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of thevoltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then,check that the element resets.

6.5.2 Protection SchemeIn the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,

fault and post-fault conditions.Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated faultoccurs.

Page 121: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 121/215

 

    120    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.

Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing thestatus of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary inputcircuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record"screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD displayonly shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details onhow to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

6.6 Conjunct ive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, systemvoltage and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.

  Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.

  Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

 V a * * . * * k V

 V b * * . * * k V

 V c * * . * * k V

 V e s * * . * * k V

 V a b * * . * * k V

 V b c * * . * * k V

 V c a * * . * * k V

 V 1 * * * . * k V

 V 2 * * * . * k V

 V 0 * * . * * k V

f * * . * * H z

 

Note:  The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary

side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)

6.6.2 Tripping Circui t Test

The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relayand monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output

relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section6.4.3.

Page 122: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 122/215

 

    121    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Tripping circuit

  Set the breaker to be closed.

  Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _ 

> B O 1 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 2 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 3 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  B O 4 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

  F A I L 0

  D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

 

BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.

  Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER  key.

  Press the END  key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

 

  Keep pressing the ENTER  key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase

 breaker is tripped.

  Stop pressing the ENTER  key to reset the operation.

  Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.

Page 123: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 123/215

 

    122    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing

The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binaryinput and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test proceduresare the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAILrelay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is alsorecorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1shows LCD messages and failure locations.

The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

Err: SUM (Flash memory)

Err: RAM (SRAM)

Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)

Err: EEP (EEPROM)

Err: A/D (A/D converter)

Err: V0, Err: V2  (AC input circuit)(1)  (2)

Err: DRIVER  (BI,BO circuit)(1)  (2) 

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.

* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.

Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on theLCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.

Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

 ALM: VT (AC input circuit)(1)  (2) 

 ALM: TC (Trip circuit)(1)  (2)

 ALM: CB (Circuit breaker)(1)  (2)

 ALM: TP COUNT (Trip count)(1)  (2)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.

Page 124: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 124/215

 

    123    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the powersupply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the powersupply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in bothcases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.

If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed

relay unit.Note:  When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following

first:

- Test circuit connections are correct.

- Correct power voltage is applied.

- Correct AC inputs are applied.

- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit

If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the protection by replacing the relay.

Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is notrecommended.

Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (softwaretype form) as the relay to be replaced.

The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.

Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION  After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

  Switch off the DC power supply.

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply isde-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage todischarge.

  Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place.  To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed.  Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.

CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:  When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall

from panel.

  Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.

6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.

  Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the"ALARM" red LED is not lit.

  Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 StorageThe spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the

storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C isrecommended for long-term storage.

WARNING

Page 125: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 125/215

 

    124    

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing thecommissioning tests or maintenance tests.

  Check that all the external connections are correct.

  Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clockare correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

  Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which arerecorded during the tests.

  Press ▼   key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.

  Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

Page 126: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 126/215

 

    125     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix A

Signal List

Page 127: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 127/215

 

    126     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

0 Not in use 

1 BI1 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI1

2 BI2 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI23 BI3 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI3

4 BI4 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI4

5 BI5 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI5

6 BI6 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI6

7 Not in use

8 Not in use

9 Not in use

10 Not in use

11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1

12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group213 Not in use

14 Not in use

15 OV1 BLOCK BI command of OV1 protection scheme block

16 OV2 BLOCK BI command of OV2 protection scheme block

17 OV3 BLOCK BI command of OV3 protection scheme block

18 UV1 BLOCK BI command of UV1 protection scheme block

19 UV2 BLOCK BI command of UV2 protection scheme block

20 UV3 BLOCK BI command of UV3 protection scheme block

21 ZPS1 BLOCK BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block

22 ZPS2 BLOCK BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block23 NPS1 BLOCK BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block

24 NPS2 BLOCK BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block

25 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm

26 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact

27 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact

28 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase)

29 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase)

30 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase)

31 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase)

32 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset33 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock

34 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record

35 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1

36 ALARM2 BI command of Alarm2

37 ALARM3 BI command of Alarm3

38 ALARM4 BI command of Alarm4

39 Not in use

40 Not in use

Page 128: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 128/215

 

    127     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

41 Not in use

42 FRQ1 BLOCK BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block

43 FRQ2 BLOCK BI command of FRQ2 protection scheme block

44 FRQ3 BLOCK BI command of FRQ3 protection scheme block45 FRQ4 BLOCK BI command of FRQ4 protection scheme block

46 Not in use

47 Not in use

48 Not in use

49 Not in use

50 Not in use

51 OV1-A INST OV1-A relay element start

52 OV1-B INST OV1-B relay element start

53 OV1-C INST OV1-C relay element start

54 Not in use55 Not in use

56 Not in use

57 OV2-A INST OV2-A relay element start

58 OV2-B INST OV2-B relay element start

59 OV2-C INST OV2-C relay element start

60 Not in use

61 Not in use

62 Not in use

63 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output

64 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output65 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output

66 OV2-A OV2-A relay element output

67 OV2-B OV2-B relay element output

68 OV2-C OV2-C relay element output

69 OV3-A OV3-A relay element output

70 OV3-B OV3-B relay element output

71 OV3-C OV3-C relay element output

72 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output

73 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output

74 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output75 UV2-A UV2-A relay element output

76 UV2-B UV2-B relay element output

77 UV2-C UV2-C relay element output

78 UV3-A UV3-A relay element output

79 UV3-B UV3-B relay element output

80 UV3-C UV3-C relay element output

81 Not in use

82 Not in use

83 Not in use

84 Not in use

Page 129: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 129/215

 

    128     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

85 Not in use

86 Not in use

87 Not in use

88 Not in use89 Not in use

90 Not in use

91 Not in use

92 Not in use

93 ZPS1 ZPS1 relay element output

94 ZPS2 ZPS2 relay element output

95 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output

96 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output

97 VBLK UV protection scheme block

98 Not in use99 Not in use

100 Not in use

101 OV1 TRIP OV1 trip command

102 OV1-A TRIP OV1 trip command (A Phase)

103 OV1-B TRIP OV1 trip command (B Phase)

104 OV1-C TRIP OV1 trip command (C Phase)

105 Not in use

106 Not in use

107 Not in use

108 OV2 TRIP OV2 trip command109 OV2-A TRIP OV2 trip command (A Phase)

110 OV2-B TRIP OV2 trip command (B Phase)

111 OV2-C TRIP OV2 trip command (C Phase)

112 Not in use

113 Not in use

114 Not in use

115 OV3 TRIP OV3 trip command

116 OV3-A TRIP OV3 trip command (A Phase)

117 OV3-B TRIP OV3 trip command (B Phase)

118 OV3-C TRIP OV3 trip command (C Phase)119 Not in use

120 Not in use

121 Not in use

122 UV1 TRIP UV1 trip command

123 UV1-A TRIP UV1 trip command (A Phase)

124 UV1-B TRIP UV1 trip command (B Phase)

125 UV1-C TRIP UV1 trip command (C Phase)

126 UV2 TRIP UV2 trip command

127 UV2-A TRIP UV2 trip command (A Phase)

128 UV2-B TRIP UV2 trip command (B Phase)129 UV2-C TRIP UV2 trip command (C Phase)

Page 130: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 130/215

 

    129     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

130 UV3 TRIP UV3 trip command

131 UV3-A TRIP UV3 trip command (A Phase)

132 UV3-B TRIP UV3 trip command (B Phase)

133 UV3-C TRIP UV3 trip command (C Phase)134 ZPS1 TRIP ZPS1 trip command

135 ZPS2 ALARM ZPS2 alarm command

136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command

137 NPS2 ALARM NPS2 alarm command

138 Not in use

139 Not in use

140 Not in use

141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command

142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase)

143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase)144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase)

145 Not in use

146 Not in use

147 Not in use

148 Not in use

149 Not in use

150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command

151 Not in use

152 Not in use

153 Not in use154 Not in use

155 Not in use

156

157 UV1-A INST UV1-A relay element start

158 UV1-B INST UV1-B relay element start

159 UV1-C INST UV1-C relay element start

160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off

161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm

162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)

163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure

165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm

166 Not in use

167 OT ALARM Operate time alarm

168 V0 ERR V0 error

169 V2 ERR V2 error

170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated

171 BO2OP Binary Output2 operated

172 BO3OP Binary Output3 operated

173 BO4OP Binary Output4 operated

Page 131: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 131/215

 

    130     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

174 Not in use

175 Not in use

176 Not in use

177 UV2-A INST UV2-A relay element start178 UV2-B INST UV2-B relay element start

179 UV2-C INST UV2-C relay element start

180 Not in use

181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command

182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command

183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command

184 Not in use

185 Not in use

186 TESTING Testing LED lit output

187 Not in use188 Not in use

189 Not in use

190 Not in use

191 Not in use

192 Not in use

193 Not in use

194 Not in use

195 Not in use

196 Not in use

197 ZPS1 INST ZPS1 relay element start198 ZPS2 INST ZPS2 relay element start

199 NPS1 INST NPS1 relay element start

200 NPS2 INST NPS2 relay element start

201 Not in use

202 Not in use

203 Not in use

204 Not in use

205 Not in use

206 Not in use

207 Not in use208 Not in use

209 Not in use

210 Not in use

211 F11 FRQ1 relay F11 element output

212 F12 FRQ1 relay F12 element output

213 DF-R1 DFRQ1 relay rise element output

214 DF-D1 DFRQ1 relay decay element output

215 F21 FRQ2 relay F21 element output

216 F22 FRQ2 relay F22 element output

217 DF-R2 DFRQ2 relay rise element output

Page 132: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 132/215

 

    131     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

218 DF-D2 DFRQ2 relay decay element output

219 F31 FRQ3 relay F31 element output

220 F32 FRQ3 relay F32 element output

221 DF-R3 DFRQ3 relay rise element output222 DR-D3 DFRQ3 relay decay element output

223 F41 FRQ4 relay F41 element output

224 F42 FRQ4 relay F42 element output

225 DF-R4 DFRQ4 relay rise element output

226 DF-D4 DFRQ4 relay decay element output

227 Not in use

228 Not in use

229 Not in use

230 Not in use

231 F11 TRIP FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command232 F12 TRIP FRQ1 relay F12 Trip command

233 DF-R1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command

234 DF-D1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command

235 FRQ1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command

236 F21 TRIP FRQ2 relay F21 Trip command

237 F22 TRIP FRQ2 relay F22 Trip command

238 DF-R2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay rise Trip command

239 DF-D2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay decay Trip command

240 FRQ2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command

241 F31 TRIP FRQ3 relay F31 Trip command242 F32 TRIP FRQ3 relay F32 Trip command

243 DF-R3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay rise Trip command

244 DF-D3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay decay Trip command

245 FRQ3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command

246 F41 TRIP FRQ4 relay F41 Trip command

247 F42 TRIP FRQ4 relay F42 Trip command

248 DF-R4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay rise Trip command

249 DF-D4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay decay Trip command

250 FRQ4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command

251 FRQ STAGE1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command252 FRQ STAGE2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command

253 FRQ STAGE3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command

254 FRQ STAGE4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command

255 FVBLK Frequency element scheme block

256 Not in use

257 Not in use

258 Not in use

259 Not in use

260 Not in use

270 LOCAL Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state271 REMOTE Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state

Page 133: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 133/215

 

    132     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. SIGNAL Name Contents

272 CB_OPN_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open

273 CB_CLS_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close

274 CB_OPN_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open275 CB_CLS_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close

276 CB_OPN_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open

277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close

278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock

279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock

280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output

281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output

282 Not in use

283 Not in use

284 Not in use285 Not in use

286 IDMT_s1_a OV1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)

287 IDMT_s1_b OV1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)

288 IDMT_s1_c OV1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)

289 IDMT_s1_n ZPS1 integrated value = 0

290 IDMT_s1_z NPS1 integrated value = 0

291 IDMT_s2_a OV2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)

292 IDMT_s2_b OV2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)

293 IDMT_s2_c OV2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)

294 IDMT_s2_n ZPS2 integrated value = 0295 IDMT_s2_z NPS2 integrated value = 0

296 Not in use

297 Not in use

298 Not in use

299 Not in use

300 Not in use

Page 134: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 134/215

 

    133     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix BEvent Record Items

Page 135: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 135/215

 

    134     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

ID. LCD indication Contents

1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command

2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase)

3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase)4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase)

5 GEN.trip-AB Off / On General trip command (A-B Phase)

6 GEN.trip-BC Off / On General trip command (B-C Phase)

7 GEN.trip-CA Off / On General trip command (C-A Phase)

8 OV1-A trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A Phase)

9 OV1-B trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B Phase)

10 OV1-C trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C Phase)

11 OV2-A trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A Phase)

12 OV2-B trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B Phase)

13 OV2-C trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C Phase)14 OV3-A alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A Phase)

15 OV3-B alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B Phase)

16 OV3-C alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C Phase)

17 UV1-A trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A Phase)

18 UV1-B trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B Phase)

19 UV1-C trip Off / On UV1 trip command (C Phase)

20 UV2-A trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A Phase)

21 UV2-B trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B Phase)

22 UV2-C trip Off / On UV2 trip command (C Phase)

23 UV3-A alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A Phase)

24 UV3-B alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B Phase)25 UV3-C alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C Phase)

26 OV1-AB trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A-B Phase)

27 OV1-BC trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B-C Phase)

28 OV1-CA trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C-A Phase)

29 OV2-AB trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A-B Phase)

30 OV2-BC trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B-C Phase)

31 OV2-CA trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C-A Phase)

32 OV3-AB alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)

33 OV3-BC alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)

34 OV3-CA alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)35 UV1-AB trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A-B Phase)

36 UV1-BC trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B-C Phase)

37 UV1-CA trip Off / On UV1 trip command(C-A Phase)

38 UV2-AB trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A-B Phase)

39 UV2-BC trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B-C Phase)

40 UV2-CA trip Off / On UV2 trip command(C-A Phase)

41 UV3-AB alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)

42 UV3-BC alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)

Page 136: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 136/215

 

    135     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. LCD indication Contents

43 UV3-CA alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)

44 OV1 trip Off / On OV1 trip command

45 OV2 trip Off / On OV2 trip command

46 OV3 trip Off / On OV3 trip command47 UV1 trip Off / On UV1 trip command

48 UV2 trip Off / On UV2 trip command

49 UV3 trip Off / On UV3 trip command

50 ZPS1 trip Off / On ZPS1 trip command

51 ZPS2 alarm Off / On ZPS2 alarm command

52 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command

53 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command

54 OV1-A Off / On OV1-A relay element operating

55 OV1-B Off / On OV1-B relay element operating

56 OV1-C Off / On OV1-C relay element operating

57 OV2-A Off / On OV2-A relay element operating58 OV2-B Off / On OV2-B relay element operating

59 OV2-C Off / On OV2-C relay element operating

60 OV3-A Off / On OV3-A relay element operating

61 OV3-B Off / On OV3-B relay element operating

62 OV3-C Off / On OV3-C relay element operating

63 UV1-A Off / On UV1-A relay element operating

64 UV1-B Off / On UV1-B relay element operating

65 UV1-C Off / On UV1-C relay element operating

66 UV2-A Off / On UV2-A relay element operating

67 UV2-B Off / On UV2-B relay element operating68 UV2-C Off / On UV2-C relay element operating

69 UV3-A Off / On UV3-A relay element operating

70 UV3-B Off / On UV3-B relay element operating

71 UV3-C Off / On UV3-C relay element operating

72 OV1-AB Off / On OV1-AB relay element operating

73 OV1-BC Off / On OV1-BC relay element operating

74 OV1-CA Off / On OV1-CA relay element operating

75 OV2-AB Off / On OV2-AB relay element operating

76 OV2-BC Off / On OV2-BC relay element operating

77 OV2-CA Off / On OV2-CA relay element operating

78 OV3-AB Off / On OV3-AB relay element operating

79 OV3-BC Off / On OV3-BC relay element operating

80 OV3-CA Off / On OV3-CA relay element operating

81 UV1-AB Off / On UV1-AB relay element operating

82 UV1-BC Off / On UV1-BC relay element operating

83 UV1-CA Off / On UV1-CA relay element operating

84 UV2-AB Off / On UV2-AB relay element operating

85 UV2-BC Off / On UV2-BC relay element operating

86 UV2-CA Off / On UV2-CA relay element operating

87 UV3-AB Off / On UV3-AB relay element operating

88 UV3-BC Off / On UV3-BC relay element operating

Page 137: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 137/215

 

    136     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. LCD indication Contents

89 UV3-CA Off / On UV3-CA relay element operating

90 OV1 Off / On OV1 relay element operating

91 OV2 Off / On OV2 relay element operating92 OV3 Off / On OV3 relay element operating

93 UV1 Off / On UV1 relay element operating

94 UV2 Off / On UV2 relay element operating

95 UV3 Off / On UV3 relay element operating

96 ZPS1 Off / On ZPS1 relay element operating

97 ZPS2 Off / On ZPS2 relay element operating

98 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating

99 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating

100 VBLK Off / On VBLK element operating

101 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1

102 BI2 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI2103 BI3 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI3

104 BI4 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI4

105 BI5 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI5

106 BI6 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI6

107 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1

108 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2

109 OV1 block Off / On BI command of OV1 protection scheme block

110 OV2 block Off / On BI command of OV2 protection scheme block

111 OV3 block Off / On BI command of OV3 protection scheme block

112 UV1 block Off / On BI command of UV1 protection scheme block113 UV2 block Off / On BI command of UV2 protection scheme block

114 UV3 block Off / On BI command of UV3 protection scheme block

115 ZPS1 block Off / On BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block

116 ZPS2 block Off / On BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block

117 NPS1 block Off / On BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block

118 NPS2 block Off / On BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block

119 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm

120 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact

121 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact

122 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase)

123 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase)

124 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase)

125 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase)

126 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset

127 SYNC Off / On

128 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record

129 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1

130 Alarm2 Off / On BI command of Alarm2

131 Alarm3 Off / On BI command of Alarm3

132 Alarm4 Off / On BI command of Alarm4

133 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm

Page 138: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 138/215

 

    137     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. LCD indication Contents No.

134 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)

135 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure

136 CB err Off / On Circuit Breaker failure

137 V0 err Off / On Zero phase input circuit failure138 V2 err Off / On VT circuit supervision failure

139 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm

140 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records

141 E.record CLR On Clear Event records

142 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records

143 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter

144 IND.reset On Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.

145 Data lost OnRecord and time for data lost with power supply

de-energized for an extended period

146 Sys.Set Change On System setting change command

147 Rly.Set Change On Relay setting change command148 Grp.Set Change On Group setting change command

149 OV1-A INST Off / On OV1-A relay element start

150 OV1-B INST Off / On OV1-B relay element start

151 OV1-C INST Off / On OV1-C relay element start

152 OV2-A INST Off / On OV2-A relay element start

153 OV2-B INST Off / On OV2-B relay element start

154 OV2-C INST Off / On OV2-C relay element start

155 UV1-A INST Off / On UV1-A relay element start

156 UV1-B INST Off / On UV1-B relay element start

157 UV1-C INST Off / On UV1-C relay element start158 UV2-A INST Off / On UV2-A relay element start

159 UV2-B INST Off / On UV2-B relay element start

160 UV2-C INST Off / On UV2-C relay element start

161 OV1-AB INST Off / On OV1-AB relay element start

162 OV1-BC INST Off / On OV1-BC relay element start

163 OV1-CA INST Off / On OV1-CA relay element start

164 OV2-AB INST Off / On OV2-AB relay element start

165 OV2-BC INST Off / On OV2-BC relay element start

166 OV2-CA INST Off / On OV2-CA relay element start

167 UV1-AB INST Off / On UV1-AB relay element start

168 UV1-BC INST Off / On UV1-BC relay element start

169 UV1-CA INST Off / On UV1-CA relay element start

170 UV2-AB INST Off / On UV2-AB relay element start

171 UV2-BC INST Off / On UV2-BC relay element start

172 UV2-CA INST Off / On UV2-CA relay element start

173 OV1 INST Off / On OV1 relay element start

174 OV2 INST Off / On OV2 relay element start

175 UV1 INST Off / On UV1 relay element start

176 UV2 INST Off / On UV2 relay element start

177 ZPS1 INST Off / On ZPS1 relay element start

178 ZPS2 INST Off / On ZPS2 relay element start

Page 139: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 139/215

 

    138     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 No. LCD indication Contents No.

179 NPS1 INST Off / On NPS1 relay element start

180 NPS2 INST Off / On NPS2 relay element start

181 FREQ1 trip Off / On FREQ1 relay element operating

182 FREQ2 trip Off / On FREQ2 relay element operating183 FREQ3 trip Off / On FREQ3 relay element operating

184 FREQ4 trip Off / On FREQ4 relay element operating

185 FREQ1 block Off / On BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block

186 FREQ2 block Off / On BI command of FREQ2 protection scheme block

187 FREQ3 block Off / On BI command of FREQ3 protection scheme block

188 FREQ4 block Off / On BI command of FREQ4 protection scheme block

189 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state

190 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state

191 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open

192 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close

193 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open194 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close

195 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open

196 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close

197 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock

198 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Interlock

199 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output

200 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output

201

202

203

Page 140: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 140/215

 

    139     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix C

Binary Output Default Setting List

Page 141: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 141/215

 

    140     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

RelayModel

BO

No.

Terminal

No.

Signal

Name

Contents Setting

Signal No. Logic

(OR:0, AND:1)

Reset

(Inst:0, Del:1Latch:2)

GRE130

-410

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

R.F.

TB2:

1 - 2

3 – 4

5 - 6

7 - 8

9 - 10

NON

GENERAL TRIP

GENERAL ALARM 

NON

Relay fail

Off (Link to CB Close SW)

Relay trip (General)

(Link to CB Open SW)

Relay alarm (General)

Off

0

141

150

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

GRE130

-411

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

R.F.

TB2:

1 - 2

3 – 4

5 - 6

7 - 8

9 - 10

NON

GENERAL TRIP

GENERAL ALARM 

NON

Relay fail

Off (Link to CB Close SW)

Relay trip (General)(Link to CB Open SW)

Relay alarm (General)

Off

0

141

150

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

Page 142: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 142/215

 

    141     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix D

Details of Relay Menu andLCD & Button Operation

Page 143: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 143/215

 

    142     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

a-1

a-1 -1

a-1 b-1

MAI N MENU

RecordSt at usSet . ( vi ew)

Set . ( change)Cont rol Test

Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N

/ 4 Faul t #116/ J ul / 2010

Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear records?END=Y CANCEL=N

/ 2 Faul tVi ew recordCl ear

/ 3 Faul t

#1 16/ J ul / 201018: 13: 57. 031

/ 3 Di st urbance

#1 16/ J ul / 201018: 13: 57. 401

/ 2 EventVi ew recordCl ear

/ 3 Event

16/ J ul / 2010Ext . t r i p A On

/ 2 Di st urbance

Vi ew recordCl ear

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 3. 1.

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 3. 2.

Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 3. 3.

/ 1 Record

Faul t

Event

Di st urbance

Count er

Page 144: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 144/215

 

    143     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Cl ear Tr i ps?END=Y CANCEL=N

/ 3 Count er Tri ps ***** Tri psA *****

 Tri psB ***** Tri psC *****

/ 2 Count erVi ew count erCl ear Tr i ps

Cl ear Tr i ps ACl ear Tr i ps BCl ear Tr i ps C

Cl ear Tr i ps A?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear Tr i ps B?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear Tr i ps C?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear  I yA?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear  I yB?END=Y CANCEL=N

Cl ear  I yC?END=Y CANCEL=N

Page 145: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 145/215

 

    144     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

a- 1, -1

a-1

/ 2 Met er i ngVa **. ** kV

/ 2 16/ J ul / 201022: 56: 19 [ L]

/ 2 Bi nary I / O

I P [ 0000 00 ]

/ 2 Ry el ementAN OV1- 4[0000 ]

/ 2 Ti me sync.*BI : Act .

/ 2 LCD cont rast

/ 1 St at usMet er i ngBi nary I / ORel ay el ement

 Ti me sync.Cl ock adj ust .LCD cont rast

/ 1 Set . ( vi ew)Versi onDescri pt i onCommsRecordSt at usProt ecti onBi nary I / PBi nary O/ PLEDCont rolFr equency

Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 4.

/ 2 Versi onRel ay t ypeSof t ware

/ 2 Descri pt i onPl ant nameDescri pt i on

Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 5

GS1EM1- 03- *

/ 2 CommsAddr .Swi t ch

GRE130- 401A- 10- 10

/ 3 Addr .Addr . *

/ 3 Swi t ch

Page 146: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 146/215

Page 147: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 147/215

 

    146     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d- 1

Al arm  Text

/ 3 Group2

Parameter

/ 6 OV prot .

/ 4 Tr i pScheme swProt . el ement

/ 5 Scheme swAppl i cat i onOV prot .

UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot.

/ 5 Prot . el ementOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot .

/ 6 UV prot .

/ 6 ZPS prot .

/ 6 FRQ prot .

/ 6 OV prot .OV1 10. 0V

/ 6 UV prot .UV1 10. 0V

/ 6 ZPS prot .

ZPS1 10. 0V

/ 6 FRQ prot .FRQ1 10. 0Hz

/ 2 Bi nary I / PBI STATUSBI 1BI 2BI 3BI 4BI 5

BI 6Al arm1 TextAl arm2 TextAl arm3 TextAl arm4 Text

/ 3 BI 1 Ti mersFunct i ons

/ 3 BI 6 Ti mersFunct i ons

/ 4 Ti mersBI 1PUD 0. 00s

/ 4 Funct i ons

/ 6 Appl i cat i on

/ 3 BI STATUS

/ 6 NPS prot .

/ 6 NPS prot .NPS1 10. 0V

Page 148: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 148/215

 

    147     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 4.

Set . ( change)I nput [ _ ]

1234567890 

Set . ( change)Ret ype [ _ ]

1234567890 

: Confirmation trap

: Password trap

Set . ( change)Password [ _ ]

1234567890 

Change set t i ngs?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

 _ABCDEFG

 _ABCDEFG

/ 2 Descri pt i onPl ant nameDescri pt i on

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 3.

/ 3 LED

/ 2 Bi nary O/ P

BO1 AND, DL0, 0, 0, 0

BO4 OR , Lat141, 1, 2, 3

Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 2.

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-2

/ 2 CommsAddr .Swi t ch

/ 3 Addr .Addr

/ 3 Swi t ch

RS485

/ 1 Set . ( change)PasswordDescri pt i onCommsRecordSt at usProt ect i on

Bi nary I / PBi nary O/ PLEDCont rolFr equency

/ 2 LEDLEDVi r t ual LED

/ 3 Vi r t ual LEDI ND1I ND2

/ 4 I ND1BI T1 I , O

/ 4 I ND2BI T1 I , O

/ 2 Cont rol

/ 2 Frequency

Page 149: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 149/215

 

    148     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

a-1 b-2 c- 2 d-2 

a-1 b- 2 

/ 4 Ti me/ star t er

/ 4 Scheme sw

/ 2 RecordEventDi st urbanceCounter

/ 3 Di st urbance Ti me/ st ar t erScheme swBi nary si g.

/ 3 Met er i ngDi spl ay

/ 3 Ti me sync. Ti me sync.

/ 2 St at usMeter i ng Ti me sync.

/ 2 Prot ecti onChange act . gp.Change set.Copy gp.

/ 3 Change act.

gp.

/ 3 Act gp. =1CommonGroup1Group2

Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 7.

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 6.

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 5.

/ 4 Scheme sw

/ 4 Al armset

/ 3 Count erScheme swAl armset

/ 4 Bi nary si g.

/ 3 EventBI 1 comm.BI 1 comm. 3 _ N/ O/ R/ B

::

/ 4 Common

APPL

Page 150: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 150/215

 

    149     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

a-1 b- 2 c-2 d- 2 

 _ABCDEFG

/ 4 Group1Parameter Tri p

/ 5 ParameterLi ne nameCT rat i o

/ 4 Group2Parameter

/ 6 VT rat i oVTS

/ 5 Tr i pScheme swProt . el ement

/ 7 OV prot .

/ 6 Scheme swAppl i cat i onOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .NPS prot .FRQ prot .

/ 6 Prot . el ementOV prot .UV prot .ZPS prot .

NPS prot .FRQ prot .

/ 7 UV prot .

/ 7 ZPS prot .

/ 7 FRQ prot .

/ 7 OV prot .

/ 7 UV prot .

/ 7 ZPS prot .

/ 7 FRQ prot .

/ 7 Appl i cat i on

a-1, b- 2 c- 2 

/ 7 NPS prot .

/ 7 NPS prot .

Page 151: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 151/215

 

    150     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

/ 3 Copy A t o BA _B _

Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 8.

/ 4 Logi c/ Reset

/ 4 Funct i ons

/ 3 BO1Logi c/ ResetFunct i ons

/ 2 Bi nary O/ PBO1BO2

BO3BO4 / 3 BO4

Logi c/ ResetFunct i ons

Ref er t o Sect i on4. 2. 6. 10.

Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 6. 9.

/ 2 Bi nary I / PBI St at usBI 1BI 2BI 3BI 4BI 5

BI 6Al arm1 TextAl arm2 TextAl arm3 TextAl arm4 Text

/ 3 BI 1 Ti mersFunct i ons

/ 3 BI 6

 Ti mersFunct i ons

 ABCDEFG

/ 4 Ti mers

/ 4 Funct i ons

Al arm  Text

a-1 b-2 c-2

a-1 b-2 c-3

/ 5 Logi c/ Reset

/ 5 Funct i ons

/ 4 LED1Logi c/ ResetFunct i onsLED Col or

/ 3 LEDLED1LED2LED3LED4LED5LED6CB CLOSED

/ 4 LED6Logi c/ ResetFunct i onsLED Col or

/ 2 LEDLEDVi r t ual LED

/ 5 LED Col or

/ 4 CB CLOSEDLED Col or

/ 5 LED Col or

/ 3 BI St at usBI THR1

Page 152: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 152/215

 

    151     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Operate?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/ 1 TestPassword( Test )Swi t chBi nary O/ P

/ 2 Swi t ch

A. M. F. 1 _Of f / OnUVTST 0Of f / S0/ S3

/ 2 Bi nary O/ P

BO1 0 _Di sabl e/ Enabl e

BO4 0Di sabl e/ Enabl e

Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 8.

a-1 b-2 c-3

/ 3 Vi r t ual LEDI ND1I ND2

/ 5 Reset

/ 5 Funct i ons

/ 4 I ND1ResetFunct i ons

/ 4 I ND2ResetFunct i ons

Cont rolI nput [ _ ]

1234567890

  Cont rolRet ype [ _ ]

1234567890 Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 7. 2.

/ 1 Cont rolPassword( Ct r l )Local / RemoteCB OPEN/ CLOSE

Ref er t o Sect i on 4. 2. 7

: Password trap

Cont rolPassword [ _ ]

1234567890 

 TestI nput [ _ ]

1234567890

  TestRet ype [ _ ]

1234567890 Ref er to Sect i on4. 2. 8. 2. : Password trap

 TestPassword [ _ ]

1234567890 

/ 2 Cont rol

/ 2 Frequency

Page 153: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 153/215

 

    152     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix E

Case Outline

Page 154: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 154/215

 

    153     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Rear View Panel cut-out2 holes-φ4

  for Panel mounting kit

143

         1         6         0

1 23 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

TB2

TB1

RJ45

for Optional Unit

Terminal block

TB2

TB1

         1         7         7

149 17 127 24

Front View Side View

 Case Outline

Page 155: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 155/215

 

    154     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix F

Typical External Connection

Page 156: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 156/215

 

    155     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

A

B

C

CLOSE

COIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE

SW

Relay fail

TB1

12

34567891011121314

CB OPEN

SW

TRIP

COIL

P

N

FG

POWER

SUPPLY+-

GND

12

3

456

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control

Power

N.C.

GRE130-410A

APPL ; 1PP

N.C.

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail

indicator

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

(CB CLOSED)

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS(CB OPEN)FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

BO2 GENERAL TRIP

BO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTS

SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 

Controled

CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

 

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A  1PP setting

Page 157: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 157/215

 

    156     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

A

B

C

CLOSE

COIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE

SW

Relay fail

TB1

1

234567891011121314

CB OPEN

SW

TRIP

COIL

P

N

FG

POWER

SUPPLY+-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

ControlPower

N.C.

GRE130-411A

APPL ; 1PN

N.C.

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

Threshold33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail

indicator

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

BO2 GENERAL TRIP

BO3 GENERAL ALARM

BO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTS

SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 

Controled

CB

Threshold

77/154V

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

(CB CLOSED)

(CB OPEN)

 *BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A  1PN setting

Page 158: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 158/215

 

    157     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

A

B

C

CLOSE

COIL

Vab

Vbc

Ve

CB CLOSE

SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN

SW

TRIP

COIL

P

N

FG

POWER

SUPPLY+-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

13

141516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control

Power

N.C.

GRE130-410A

APPL ; 2PP

2PZ

N.C.

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail

indicator

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIP

BO3 GENERAL ALARM

BO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTS

SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 

Controled

CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

(CB CLOSED)AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

(CB OPEN)

 

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A  2PP ( 2PZ ) setting

Page 159: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 159/215

 

    158     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A  3PN ( 3PV ) setting

Page 160: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 160/215

 

    159     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

A

B

C

CLOSE

COIL

Vab

Vbc

Vca

Ve

CB CLOSE

SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPENSW

TRIP

COIL

P

N

FG

POWER

SUPPLY+-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control

Power

N.C.

GRE130-410A

APPL ; 3PP

N.C.

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

Threshold

33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail

indicator

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

(CB CLOSED)

AUXILIARY

Available for

TCS

(CB OPEN)

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIP

BO3 GENERAL ALARM

BO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTS

SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 

Controled

CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

 

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A  3PP setting

Page 161: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 161/215

 

    160     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix G

Relay Sett ing Sheet

1. Relay Identification

2. Line parameter

3. Contacts setting

4. Relay setting sheet

Page 162: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 162/215

 

    161     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number

Frequency AC voltage

DC supply voltage  Active setting group

Password

Setting

Control

Test

2. Line parameter

VT ratio PVT: RVT:

3. Contacts settingTB2

BO1 Terminal 1-2

BO2 Terminal 3-4

BO3 Terminal 5-6

BO4 Terminal 7-8

BI1 Terminal 13-14

BI2 Terminal 15-16

BI3 Terminal 17-22BI4 Terminal 18-22

BI5 Terminal 19-22

BI6 Terminal 20-22

Page 163: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 163/215

 

    162     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4. Relay setting sheet

Menu Name Range Contents Default

Password(Set) 0000 – 9999Password for

Setting change

 None

(0000)

Password(Ctrl) 0000 – 9999 Password for Control None

(0000)Password

Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test None

(0000)

Plant name Specified by user Plant name - 

DescriptionDescription ditto

Memorandum

for user- 

Addr. 1 - 247Relay ID No.

for Modbus

1Communi

-cationRS485 9.6 / 19.2 Baud rate for Modbus 19.2

BI1 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI1 command trigger

Both(3)

BI2 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI2 command trigger

Both(3)

BI3 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI3 command trigger

Both(3)

BI4 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI4 command trigger

Both(3)

BI5 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI5 command trigger

Both(3)

Event

Record

BI6 comm. None/Operate/

Reset/BothBI6 command trigger

Both(3)

Time1 0.1 – 4.9 sRecording period

 before fault

3.0

Time2 0.1 – 4.9 sRecording period

after fault

2.0

OV 10.0 – 200.0 VOV element

for disturbance

UV 1.0 – 130.0 VUV element

for disturbance

 NPS 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS element

for disturbance

ZPS 1.0 – 160.0 VZPS element

for disturbance

Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger OnBI Off / On Disturbance trigger On

OV Off / On Disturbance trigger On

Disturbance

Record

Page 164: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 164/215

 

    163     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

UV Off / On Disturbance Trigger On

 NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On

ZPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On

SIG1 0 - 350 51

SIG2 0 – 350 52SIG3 0 – 350 53

SIG4 0 – 350 63

SIG5 0 – 350 102

SIG6 0 – 350 103

SIG7 0 – 350 104

SIG8 0 – 350 117

SIG9 0 – 350 141

SIG10 0 – 350 142

SIG11 0 – 350 143

SIG12 0 – 350 144

SIG13 0 – 350 145SIG14 0 – 350 0

SIG15 0 – 350 0

SIG16…30 0 – 350 0

SIG31 0 – 350 0

Disturbance

Record

SIG32 0 – 350

Disturbance Trigger

0

TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-OnTrip Circuit

Supervision Enable

Off

CBSMEN Off / On

Circuit Breaker

State Monitoring

Alarm Enable

Off

TCAEN Off / On Trip Count AlarmEnable Off

Counter

TCALM 1 – 10000Trip Count Alarm

Threshold

10000

Display Pri / Sec Metering Pri

Time sync. Off / BI / Modbus Time OffStatus

Page 165: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 165/215

 

    164     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

BITHR1 48 / 110 /220 BI1,BI2 Threshold 110

BITHR2 110 / 220 BI3-BI6 Threshold 110

BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm

BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off

OV1BLK Off / On OV1 Block Off

OV2BLK Off / On OV2 Block Off

OV3BLK Off / On OV3 Block Off

UV1BLK Off / On UV1 Block Off

UV2BLK Off / On UV2 Block Off

UV3BLK Off / On UV3 Block Off

ZP1BLK Off / On ZPS1 Block Off

ZP2BLK Off / On ZPS2 Block Off

 NP1BLK Off / On NPS1 Block Off NP2BLK Off / On NPS2 Block Off

TCFALM Off / OnTrip Circuit

Fail Alarm

Off

CBOPN Off / OnCircuit Breaker

Open

Off

CBCLS Off / OnCircuit Breaker

Closed

Off

EXT3PH Off / OnExternal Trip

 – 3 Phase

Off

EXTAPH Off / OnExternal Trip

 – A Phase

Off

EXTBPH Off / OnExternal Trip

 – B Phase

Off

EXTCPH Off / OnExternal Trip

 – C Phase

Off

RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off

SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off

STORCD Off / OnStore Disturbance

Record

Off

Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off

Alarm2 Off / On Alarm screen 2 Off

Alarm3 Off / On Alarm screen 3 Off

Alarm4 Off / On Alarm screen 4 Off

RMTOPN Off / OnRemote CB

Open Control

Off

RMTCLS Off / OnRemote CB

Close Control

Off

Binary

InputBI1

Page 166: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 166/215

 

    165     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off

FRQ1BLK Off / On FRQ1 Block Off

FRQ2BLK Off / On FRQ2 Block Off

FRQ3BLK Off / On FRQ3 Block Off

BI1

FRQ4BLK Off / On FRQ4 Block Off

BI2PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI2DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI2 Drop-off

delay

0.00

BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm

BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2BI2 Settings

Group

Off

BI2

The following items are same as BI1

BI3PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI3DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI3 Drop-off

delay

0.00

BI3SNS Norm / Inv BI3 Trigger Norm

BI3SGS Off / 1 / 2BI3 Settings

Group

Off

BI3

The following items are same as BI1

BI4PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI4 Drop-off

delay

0.00

BI4SNS Norm / Inv BI4 Trigger Norm

BI4SGS Off / 1 / 2BI4 Settings

Group

Off

BI4

The following items are same as BI1

BI5PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI5 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI5DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI5 Drop-off

delay

0.00

BI5SNS Norm / Inv BI5 Trigger Norm

BI5SGS Off / 1 / 2BI5 Settings

Group

Off

BI5

The following items are same as BI1

BI6PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI6 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI6DOD 0.00 – 300.00BI6 Drop-off

delay

0.00

BI6SNS Norm / Inv BI6 Trigger Norm

BI6SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI6 SettingsGroup

Off

BI6

The following items are same as BI1

Alarm1 Text Specified by user Alarm1 Text Alarm1

Alarm2 Text Specified by user Alarm2 Text Alarm2

Alarm3 Text Specified by user Alarm3 Text Alarm3

Binary

Input

Alarm4 Text Specified by user Alarm4 Text Alarm4

Page 167: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 167/215

 

    166     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR

Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI

In #1 0 – 350 Functions 141

In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0

In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0

BO1

TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20

BO2 Same as BO1

BO3 Same as BO1

Binary

Output

BO4 Same as BO1

Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR

Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst

In #1 0 – 350 Functions 0

In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0

In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0

LED1

Color R / G / Y LED Color R

LED2 Same as LED1

LED3 Same as LED1

LED4 Same as LED1

LED5 Same as LED1

CB CLOSED Color R / G / YCB CLOSED LED

Color

R

IND1 Reset Inst / LatchIND1 Reset

operation

Inst

IND2 Reset Inst / Latch

IND2 Reset

operation

Inst

BIT1 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT2 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT3 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT4 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT5 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT6 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

BIT7 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

IND1

BIT8 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

Confi-

gurable

LED

IND2 Same as IND1

Active gp. 1 - 2 Active setting group 1

AOLED Off / OnALARM LEDlighting control

at alarm output

On

Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Disable

Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable

Control Hierarchy Local / RemoteControl Hierarchy

(if Control = Enable)

--

(Local)

Active

group /

Common

Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz

Page 168: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 168/215

 

    167     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

Line name Specified by user Line name --

PVT 1 – 20000VT ratio of

Phase VT100

RVT 1 – 20000VT ratio ofEarth Fault CT

100

SVCNT ALM&BLK / ALM AC input imbalanceALM&

BLK

OV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV1 Enable Off

OV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV2 Enable OffOV

OV3EN Off / On OV3 Enable Off

UV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV1 Enable DT

UV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV2 Enable Off

UV3EN Off / On UV3 Enable OffUV

VBKEN Off / On UV Block Enable Off

ZPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS1 Enable DTZPSZPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS2 Enable Off

 NPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS1 Enable Off NPS

 NPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS2 Enable Off

FT1 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ1 Enable B

DFT1 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ1 Enable Both

Logic1 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ1 logic L1

FT2 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ2 Enable B

DFT2 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ2 Enable Both

Logic2 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ2 logic L1

FT3 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ3 Enable B

DFT3 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ3 Enable Both

Logic3 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ3 logic L1

FT4 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ4 Enable B

DFT4 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ4 Enable Both

FRQ

Logic4 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ4 logic L1

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V OV1 Threshold 120.0 V

TOV1 0.05 – 100.00OV1 Time multiplier

(if OV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 sOV1 Definite time

(if OV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95%

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V OV2 Threshold 140.0 V

TOV2 0.05 – 100.00OV2 Time multiplier

(if OV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 sOV2 Definite time

(if OV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 95%

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V OV3 Threshold 160.0 V

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s OV3 Definite time 0.10 s

OV3DPR 10 – 98 % OV3 DO/PU ratio 95%

Protection

OV

Page 169: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 169/215

 

    168     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Menu Name Range Contents Default

OV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00

OV1-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

OV1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT

Curve setting.

(if OV1EN = C) 0.000OV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00

OV2-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

OV

OV2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT

Curve setting.

(if OV2EN = C) 0.000

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V UV1 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV1 0.05 – 100.00UV1 Time multiplier

(if UV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 sUV1 Definite time

(if UV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V UV2 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV2 0.05 – 100.00 UV2 Time multiplier(if UV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 sUV2 Definite time

(if UV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V UV3 Threshold 20.0 V

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s UV3 Definite time 0.10 s

VBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V UV Blocking 10.0 V

UV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00

UV1-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

UV1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT

Curve setting.

(if UV1EN = C) 0.000

UV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00UV2-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

UV

UV2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMTCurve setting.

(if UV2EN = C) 0.000

ZPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS1 Threshold 20.0 V

TZPS1 0.05 – 100.00ZPS1 Time multiplier

(if ZPS1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 sZPS1 Definite time

(if ZPS1EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s

ZPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS2 Threshold 40.0 V

TZPS2 0.05 – 100.00ZPS2 Time multiplier

(if ZPS2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 sZPS2 Definite time

(if ZPS2EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s

ZPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00

ZPS1-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

ZPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT

Curve setting.

(if ZPS1EN = C) 0.000

ZPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00

ZPS2-α  0.00 – 5.00 1.00

Protection

ZPS

ZPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT

Curve setting.

(if ZPS2EN = C) 0.000

Page 170: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 170/215

Page 171: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 171/215

 

    170     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix H

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)

1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

Page 172: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 172/215

 

    171     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number

Model System frequency

Station Date

Circuit Engineer

Protection scheme Witness

Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

Power supply

Wiring

Calendar and clock

3.  Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

Binary input circuitBinary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

Page 173: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 173/215

 

    172     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.  Function test

4.1  Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1

OV2

OV3

UV1

UV2

UV3

ZPS1

ZPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multipli er setting Changed voltage Measured time

OV1  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

OV2  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

UV1  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

UV2  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

ZPS1  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

ZPS2  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

Page 174: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 174/215

 

    173     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NPS1

NPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multipl ier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NPS1  Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

NPS2  Voltage setting Voltage setting

 Voltage setting

4.3 Frequency elements test

Element Frequency setting Measured frequency

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

5.  Protection scheme test

6.  Metering and recording check

Page 175: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 175/215

 

    174     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix I

Return Repair Form

Page 176: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 176/215

 

    175     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the

GRE130 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRE130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRE130 Model: 411A )

Product No.:

Serial No.:

Date:

1. Reason for returning the relay

  mal-function

  does not operate

  increased error

  investigation required

  others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are

very helpful information to investigate the incident.

Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB sticl or CD rom, or fill

in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

Page 177: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 177/215

 

    176     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Fault Record

Date/Month/Year Time / /

/ : : .

(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values

Van: V

V bn: V

Vcn: V

Vab: V

V bc: V

Vca: V

V ph: V

V0: V

V1: VV2: V

f: Hz

Fault values

Van: V

V bn: V

Vcn: V

Vab: V

V bc: V

Vca: V

V ph: VV0: V

V1: V

V2: V

f: Hz

Page 178: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 178/215

 

    177     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4. Describe the details of the incident:

5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /

(Example: 10/Dec/2010)

6. Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:

Page 179: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 179/215

 

    178     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Customer

 Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

Page 180: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 180/215

 

    179     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix J

Technical Data

Page 181: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 181/215

 

    180     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

TECHNICAL DATA

Ratings

 AC voltage Vn: 110V

Frequency: 50/60Hz

Power supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac

(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)

48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)

24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)

Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%

Power supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V

Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication

110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)

48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc)

24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)

For trip circuit supervision

Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)

≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)

≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)

≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)

Overload Ratings

 AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous

Burden

 AC phase voltage inputs:  0.1 VA (at rated voltage)

Power supply:  10W (quiescent),  15W (maximum)Binary input circuit:  0.5W per input at 220Vdc

Overvoltage Protect ion (59)

1st, 2

nd, 3

rd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type: DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

DO/PU ratio 10 - 98% in 1% stepsReset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Protection (27)

1

st

, 2

nd

, 3

rd

 Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V stepsDelay type: DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N) 

1st, 2

nd ZPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Page 182: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 182/215

 

    181     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Negative Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47) 

1st, 2

nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Frequency Protection (81U/O) 

1st – 4

th Under frequency 45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)

54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

1st – 4

th Under frequency 50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)

60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

Frequency rate-of-change 0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps

0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps

Timer for stage 1st  - 4

th  0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps

Frequency UV Block 40 – 100V in 1V steps 

 Accuracy

IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up:

 All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups:

105% of setting  5%

100% of setting  5%

Overvoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage)

IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up: 95% of setting  5%

 All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting  5%

Undervoltage PU/DO ratio:

Over Frequency Pick-ups:

Under Frequency Pick-ups:

Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:

approx, 105%

100% of setting  0.05Hz (setting:  rated frequency - 5.00Hz)

100% of setting  0.05Hz (setting:  rated frequency + 5.00Hz)

100% of setting  0.05Hz/s (setting:  5.00Hz/s)Inverse Operate Time: IEC60255-127, 5% or 30ms

(OV; 1.2  G/Gs  GD/Gs , UV; 0  G/Gs  1) GD = 300V

OV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms  (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

UV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms  (DT, input:  80% of setting)

ZPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms  (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

NPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 50ms  (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Under/Over Frequency Operate Time

Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time

DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)

DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)

190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥  200% of setting)

160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts

Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0) 

Connector type: USB-Type B

Cable length: 5m (max.)

Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485) 

Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)

Cable type: Twisted pair

Cable length: 1200m (max.)

Page 183: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 183/215

 

    182     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Connector: Screw terminals

Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.

Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps

Rear Communication port (Ethernet) 

100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX

RJ-45 connector

SC connector

Binary Inputs

Operating voltage For signal detection

Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating

Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating

Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating

Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating

For trip circuit supervision

≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating

≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating

≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating

≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating

Binary Outputs

Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)

Ratings

model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2

model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6

other BOs

Make and carry: 5A continuously

Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R40ms)

Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Make and carry: 4A continuously

Make and carry: 8A, 250Vdc for 0.2s (L/R40ms)

Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Durability:

Pickup time:

Reset time:

Loaded contact: 1,000 operations

Unloaded contact: 10,000 operations

Less than 15ms

Less than 10ms

Mechanical design Weight 1.5kg for model 410A and 411A

1.8kg for model 412A

Width 149mm for model 410A and 411A

223mm for model 412A

Height 177mm

Depth 168mm

Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5

Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits

Page 184: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 184/215

 

    183     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE

Test Standards Details

 Atmospher ic Environment

Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2

IEC 60068-2-30

Operating range: -20C to +60C.

Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.

Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.

Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)

Mechanical Environment

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1

Endurance - Class 1

Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1

Shock Withstand Class 1

Bump Class 1

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1

Electrical Environment

Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5

IEEE C37.90.0

2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.

2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.

1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of

5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO

circuits; between terminals and earth, and between

independent circuits

3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth

3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts

1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals

and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment

High Frequency

Disturbance / Damped

Oscillatory Wave

IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-12

IEEE C37.90.1

1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.

1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Electrostatic

Discharge

IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-2

6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.

Radiated RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz

and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,

900 and 1890MHz.

Fast Transient

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A,

IEC 61000-4-4,IEEE C37.90.1

4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.

Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5,

IEC 61000-4-5

1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:

HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)

RS485 port: 1kV (peak)

Conducted RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.

 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-7 Class A,

IEC 61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.

150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.

Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and IEC 60255-25, Conducted emissions:

Page 185: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 185/215

 

    184     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Test Standards Details

Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A,

IEC 61000-6-4

0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)

0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)

Radiated emissions (at 10m):

30 to 230MHz: <40dB

230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic

EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EECCompliance with the European Commission Low Voltage

Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard

EN 60255-27.

Page 186: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 186/215

 

    185     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix K

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

Page 187: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 187/215

 

    186     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:

Signal names

Marked with : Measuring element output signal

Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to external equipment

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch

Marked with " " : Scheme switch position

Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

 AND gates

 A B C Output

1 1 1 1

Other cases 0

 A B C Output

1 1 0 1

Other cases 0

 A B C Output

1 0 0 1

Other cases 0

OR gates

 A B C Output

0 0 0 0

Other cases 1

 A B C Output

0 0 1 0Other cases 1

 A B C Output

0 1 1 0

Other cases 1

 A

OutputB &

C

 A

OutputB 1

C

 A

OutputB &

C

 A

OutputB 1

C

 A

OutputB 1

C

 A

OutputB

C

&

Page 188: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 188/215

 

    187     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Signal inversion

 A Output

0 1

1 0

Timer

Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

One-shot timer

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Flip-flop

S R Output

0 0 No change

1 0 1

0 1 0

1 1 0

Scheme switch

 A Switch Output

1 ON 1

Other cases 0

Switch Output

ON 1

OFF 0

Output A

0t

XXX

t0

XXX

0t

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY

t0

Output

Output

ON

ON

 

 A

S

OutputF/F

R

1

XXX - YYY

 A Output  A

Output

Page 189: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 189/215

 

    188     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix L

Modbus: Interoperability

Page 190: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 190/215

 

    189     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Modbus: Interoperability

1. Physical and Data Link Layer

- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface

- RTU mode only

- Coding System:

8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)

Even parity

- Address setting range: 1-247

- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200

2. Application Layer

(1) Modbus response format

FC Description Supplementary explanation

01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag

02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.

03 Read Holding Registers -

04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs

05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization

06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number

07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status

08 Diagnostic -

16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc.

17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID

43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information

For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS

Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".

For other FCs, the response format is as following:

07 Read Exception status

Response Data

Output Data (1byte)

 bit Description

0 IN SERVICE (LED)

1 TRIP (LED)

2 ALARM (LED)

3 RELAY FAIL (LED)

4 CB CLOSED (LED)

5 CB OPEN (LED)

6 Relay fail output (BO)

7 <Reserved>

Page 191: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 191/215

 

    190     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

08 Diagnostic

Response Data

SC Response Data Field Description

00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data

01 <not supported>02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register

 bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)

 bit1 TRIP (LED)

 bit2 ALARM (LED)

 bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)

 bit4 <Reserved>

 bit5 <Reserved>

 bit6 <Reserved>

 bit7 <Reserved>

 bit8 3-phase current balance alarm

 bit9 CB contact status alarm bit10 CB operation number alarm

 bit11 <Reserved>

 bit12 V0 error alarm

 bit13 V2 error alarm

 bit14 <Reserved>

 bit15 <Reserved>

03- <not supported>

17 Report Slave ID

Response Data

Byte Count (1byte) 18bytesSlave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID

GRE120-401A-00-10 ASCII

Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service

43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)

Response Data

Param OID

01 Basic device identification

00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name

01 GRE130-411 Product Code

02 A Major Minor Revision02 Regular device identification

03 <Non> Vendor URL

04 GRE120 Product Name

05 411A-10-10 Model Name

06 Overvoltage Relay User Application Name

07- <Reserved> Reserved

03 Extended device identification

80 <SPACE>

81 GS1EM1-03-A Software version

04 <not supported>One specific identification

object

Page 192: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 192/215

 

    191     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

(2) Modbus address map group

Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification

Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)

(Read/Write) 0x0400 4Remote control (command, interlock), Time

synchronization, Clear command

Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO

(Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)

0x1080 16 Virtual LED

0x1201 -  Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)

Input Registers 0x2000 40

Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not

converted to engineering units)

2-word long

(Read Only) 0x2800 40

Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc.,

converted to engineering units)

2-word long

Holding Registers 0x3000 29 Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,write protected

(Read/Write) 0x3200 72Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200

records, write protected

0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format)

0x3810 30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long

0x3E82 2 Password for remote control

0x4000 -  Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only

0x8000 Undefined after this address

Discrete Input Single bit Read-OnlyCoils Single bit Read-Write

Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only

Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write

 

(3)Modbus address map

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Coils 

Remote control (R/W) 

0200 Remote control enable flag

0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)

0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)

0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)

0403Time synchronization

commandCall time synchronization task (on)

Page 193: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 193/215

 

    192     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Discrete Input 

BI status (R) 

1000 BI1

1001 BI2

1002 BI3 Only for GRE130-411A

1003 BI4 Only for GRE130-411A

1004 BI5 Only for GRE130-411A

1005 BI6 Only for GRE130-411A

BO status (R) 

1016 Relay fail output

1017 BO1

1018 BO2

1019 BO3

101A BO4

101B BO5 Only for GRE130-412A101C BO6 Only for GRE130-412A

101D BO7 Only for GRE130-412A

101E BO8 Only for GRE130-412A

LED lamp status (R) 

1040 IN SERVICE

1041 TRIP

1042 ALARM

1043 RELAY FAIL

1044 CB CLOSED

1045 CB OPEN

1046 LOCAL1047 REMOTE

1048 LED1

1049 LED2

104A LED3

104B LED4

104C LED5

104D LED6

Virtual LED status (R) 

1080 IND1 BIT1

1081 IND1 BIT2

1082 IND1 BIT31083 IND1 BIT4

1084 IND1 BIT5

1085 IND1 BIT6

1086 IND1 BIT7

1087 IND1 BIT8

1088 IND2 BIT1

1089 IND2 BIT2

108A IND2 BIT3

108B IND2 BIT4

108C IND2 BIT5

108D IND2 BIT6108E IND2 BIT7

108F IND2 BIT8

Page 194: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 194/215

 

    193     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Signal list (R) 

1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix A

1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix A

… Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix A

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Input Registers 

Analog data (R) Followings are NOT converted to engineering units.

2000 Van / Vab / Vph (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)

2001 Van / Vab / Vph (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)

2002 Van / Vab (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

2003 Van / Vab (L)

2004 Vbn / Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)

2005 Vbn / Vbc (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)2006 Vbn / Vbc (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

2007 Vbn / Vbc (L)

2008 Vcn / Vca (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)

2009 Vcn / Vca (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)

200A Vcn / Vca (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

200B Vcn / Vca (L)

200C V0 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)

200D V0 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)

200E V0 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

200F V0 (L)

2010 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)2011 V2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)

2012 V2 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

2013 V2 (L)

2014 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)

2015 V1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)

2016 V1 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)

2017 V1 (L)

2018 <Reserved>

2019 <Reserved>

201A <Reserved>

201B <Reserved>201C <Reserved>

201D <Reserved>

201E <Reserved>

201F <Reserved>

2020 <Reserved>

2021 <Reserved>

2022 <Reserved>

2023 <Reserved>

2024 <Reserved>

2025 <Reserved>

Page 195: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 195/215

 

    194     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

2026 f (H)

2027 f (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2028 fmax (H)2029 fmax (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202A fmin (H)

202B fmin (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202C df / dt (H)

202D df / dt (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202E df / dtx (H)

202F df / dtx (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2030 df / dtn (H)

2031 df / dtn (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2032 <Reserved>

2033 <Reserved>

2034 <Reserved>

2035 <Reserved>

2036 <Reserved>

2037 <Reserved>

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Analog data (R)The following are converted to engineering units.

(the same as the displayed value)

2800 Van (H)2801 Van (L)

2802 Van (H)

2803 Van (L)

2804 Vbn (H)

2805 Vbn (L)

2806 Vbn (H)

2807 Vbn (L)

2808 Vcn (H)

2809 Vcn (L)

280A Vcn (H)

280B Vcn (L)

280C Vab (H)

280D Vab (L)

280E Vab (H)

280F Vab (L)

2810 Vbc (H)

2811 Vbc (L)

2812 Vbc (H)

2813 Vbc (L)

2814 Vca (H)

2815 Vca (L)2816 Vca (H)

2817 Vca (L)

Page 196: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 196/215

 

    195     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

2818 Vph (H)

2819 Vph (L)

281A V0 (H)

281B V0 (L)

281C V0 (H)281D V0 (L)

281E V1 (H)

281F V1 (L)

2820 V1 (H)

2821 V1 (L)

2822 V2 (H)

2823 V2 (L)

2824 V2 (H)

2825 V2 (L)

2826 f (H)

2827 f (L)

2828 fmax (H)

2829 fmax (L)

282A fmin (H)

282B fmin (L)

282C df / dt (H)

282D df / dt (L)

282E df / dtx (H)

282F df / dtx (L)

2830 df / dtn (H)

2831 df / dtn (L)2832 <Reserved>

2833 <Reserved>

2834 <Reserved>

2835 <Reserved>

2836 <Reserved>

2837 <Reserved>

Page 197: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 197/215

 

    196     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Holding Registers 

Fault record (R) 

3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)

3001 No.1Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3005 year 0-99(y)

3006 Fault phase

3007 Trip mode

3008 No.2Indication of record #2. If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3009 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

300C year 0-99(y)

300D Fault phase

300E Trip mode

300F No.3Indication of record #3. If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3010 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3011 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)3013 year 0-99(y)

3014 Fault phase

3015 Trip mode

3016 No.4Indication of record #4. If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3017 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3018 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

301A year 0-99(y)

301B Fault phase

301C Trip mode

Page 198: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 198/215

 

    197     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time.

3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200)

3201 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10records)

3202 No. XReturns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to

0.

3203 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3204 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3206 year 0-99(y)

3207 Event ID See Appendix B

3208 Action 1:on 、2:off 、 

3209 No.X+1

Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

320D year 0-99(y)

320E Event ID See Appendix B

320F Action 1:on 、2:off

3210 No.X+2Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3211 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3212 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、

0-59(m)3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3214 year 0-99(y)

3215 Event ID See Appendix B

3216 Action 1:on 、2:off

3217 No.X+3Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

3218 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3219 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

321B year 0-99(y)

321C Event ID See Appendix B321D Action 1:on 、2:off

321E No.X+4Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is

set to 0.

321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3220 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3222 year 0-99(y)

3223 Event ID See Appendix B

3224 Action 1:on 、2:off

Page 199: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 199/215

 

    198     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

3225 No.X+5Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set

to 0.

3226 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)3227 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3229 year 0-99(y)

322A Event ID See Appendix B

322B Action 1:on 、2:off

322C No.X+6Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set

to 0.

322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3230 year 0-99(y)

3231 Event ID See Appendix B

3232 Action 1:on 、2:off

3233 No.X+7Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set

to 0.

3234 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3235 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3236 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3237 year 0-99(y)

3238 Event ID See Appendix B

3239 Action 1:on 、2:off

323A No.X+8Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set

to 0.

323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

323E year 0-99(y)

323F Event ID See Appendix B

3240 Action 1:on 、2:off

3241 No.X+9Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set

to 0.

3242 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)3243 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3244 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3245 year 0-99(y)

3246 Event ID See Appendix B

3247 Action 1:on 、2:off

Page 200: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 200/215

 

    199     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format

3800 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)

3801 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)

3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)

3803 year 0-99(y)

Counters (R/W) 

3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set to an initial value.

3811 Trips Phase-A (L)

3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set to an initial value.

3813 Trips Phase-B (L)

3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set to an initial value.

3815 Trips Phase-C (L)

3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set to an initial value.3817 Trips any phase (L)

Password 

3E82 Control (H) Password for remote control (in ASCII code)

3E83 Control (L)

Setting values 

4000 See the next table for setting values.

7FFF <Reserved>

Page 201: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 201/215

 

    200     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

(4) Modbus address for setting values

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting

6035 BI2 comm. BI 2 command trigger setting

6036 BI3 comm. BI 3 command trigger setting

6037 BI4 comm. BI 4 command trigger setting

6038 BI5 comm. BI 5 command trigger setting

Event Record

6039 BI6 comm. BI 6 command trigger setting

603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault

6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault

6001 OV OC element for disturbance

6002 UV EF element for disturbance

6003 ZPS SEF element for disturbance

6004  NPS  NPS element for disturbance

6005 Trip Disturbance trigger

6006 BI Disturbance trigger

6007 OV Disturbance trigger

6008 UV Disturbance trigger

6009 ZPS Disturbance trigger

600A  NPS Disturbance trigger

603D FRQ Disturbance trigger

600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger

600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger

600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger

600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger

600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger

6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger

6011 SIG7 Disturbance trigger6012 SIG8 Disturbance trigger

6013 SIG9 Disturbance trigger

6014 SIG10 Disturbance trigger

6015 SIG11 Disturbance trigger

6016 SIG12 Disturbance trigger

6017 SIG13 Disturbance trigger

6018 SIG14 Disturbance trigger

6019 SIG15 Disturbance trigger

601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger

601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger

601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger

601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger

601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger

6020 SIG22 Disturbance trigger

6021 SIG23 Disturbance trigger

6022 SIG24 Disturbance trigger

6023 SIG25 Disturbance trigger

6024 SIG26 Disturbance trigger

6025 SIG27 Disturbance trigger

6026 SIG28 Disturbance trigger

6027 SIG29 Disturbance trigger

6028 SIG30 Disturbance trigger

6029 SIG31 Disturbance trigger

DisturbanceRecord

602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger

Page 202: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 202/215

 

    201     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable

602C CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable

602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm EnableCounter6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting

6400 Display MeteringStatus

6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method

6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2

6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6

6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay

6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay

6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense

6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select

6C06 BI1 OV1BLK OV1 Block

6C07 BI1 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6C08 BI1 OV3BLK OV3 Block6C09 BI1 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6C0A BI1 UV2BLK UV2 Block

6C0B BI1 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C0C BI1 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6C0D BI1 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6C0E BI1 NP1BLK NPS1 Block

6C0F BI1 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6C10 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

6C11 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6C12 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6C13 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

6C14 BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase6C15 BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6C16 BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6C17 BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset

6C18 BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6C19 BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6C1A BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6C1B BI1 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6C1C BI1 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

6C1D BI1 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6C1E BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6C1F BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6C20 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input

6C21 BI1 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6C22 BI1 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6C23 BI1 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

6C24 BI1 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

6C25 BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay

6C26 BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay

6C27 BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense

6C28 BI2 BI2SGS Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select

6C29 BI2 OV1BLK OV1 Block

6C2A BI2 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6C2B BI2 OV3BLK OV3 Block

Binary Input

6C2C BI2 UV1BLK UV1 Block

Page 203: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 203/215

 

    202     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name UV3BLK

6C2D BI2 UV2BLK UV2 Block

6C2E BI2 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C2F BI2 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6C30 BI2 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6C31 BI2 NP1BLK NPS1 Block6C32 BI2 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6C33 BI2 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

6C34 BI2 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6C35 BI2 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6C36 BI2 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

6C37 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase

6C38 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6C39 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6C3A BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset

6C3B BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6C3C BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6C3D BI2 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6C3E BI2 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6C3F BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

6C40 BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6C41 BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6C42 BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6C43 BI2 CNTLCK Interlock Input

6C44 BI2 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6C45 BI2 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6C46 BI2 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

6C47 BI2 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

6C48 BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay

6C49 BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay

6C4A BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense

6C4B BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select

6C4C BI3 OV1BLK OV1 Block

6C4D BI3 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6C4E BI3 OV3BLK OV3 Block

6C4F BI3 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6C50 BI3 UV2BLK UV2 Block

6C51 BI3 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C52 BI3 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6C53 BI3 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6C54 BI3 NP1BLK NPS1 Block

6C55 BI3 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6C56 BI3 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

6C57 BI3 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6C58 BI3 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6C59 BI3 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

6C5A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase

6C5B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6C5C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6C5D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset

6C5E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6C5F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

Page 204: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 204/215

 

    203     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

6C60 BI3 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6C61 BI3 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6C62 BI3 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

6C63 BI3 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6C64 BI3 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6C65 BI3 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6C66 BI3 CNTLCK Interlock Input

6C67 BI3 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6C68 BI3 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6C69 BI3 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

6C6A BI3 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

6C6B BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay

6C6C BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay

6C6D BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense

6C6E BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select

6C6F BI4 OV1BLK OV1 Block

6C70 BI4 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6C71 BI4 OV3BLK OV3 Block

6C72 BI4 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6C73 BI4 UV2BLK UV2 Block

6C74 BI4 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C75 BI4 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6C76 BI4 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6C77 BI4 NP1BLK NPS1 Block

6C78 BI4 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6C79 BI4 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm6C7A BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6C7B BI4 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6C7C BI4 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

6C7D BI4 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase

6C7E BI4 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6C7F BI4 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6C80 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset

6C81 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6C82 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6C83 BI4 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6C84 BI4 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6C85 BI4 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.6C86 BI4 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6C87 BI4 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6C88 BI4 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6C89 BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input

Binary Input

6C8A BI4 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6C8B BI4 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6C8C BI4 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

6C8D BI4 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

6C8E BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay

6C8F BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay

Page 205: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 205/215

 

    204     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

6C90 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense

6C91 BI5 BI5SGS Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select

6C92 BI5 OV1BLK OV1 Block

6C93 BI5 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6C94 BI5 OV3BLK OV3 Block

6C95 BI5 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6C96 BI5 UV2BLK UV2 Block

6C97 BI5 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C98 BI5 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6C99 BI5 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6C9A BI5 NP1BLK NPS1 Block

6C9B BI5 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6C9C BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

6C9D BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6C9E BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6C9F BI5 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

6CA0 BI5 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase

6CA1 BI5 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6CA2 BI5 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6CA3 BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset

6CA4 BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6CA5 BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6CA6 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6CA7 BI5 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6CA8 BI5 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

6CA9 BI5 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6CAA BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6CAB BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6CAC BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input

6CAD BI5 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6CAE BI5 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6CAF BI5 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

6CB0 BI5 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

6CB1 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay

6CB2 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay

6CB3 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense

6CB4 BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select

6CB5 BI6 OV1BLK OV1 Block6CB6 BI6 OV2BLK OV2 Block

6CB7 BI6 OV3BLK OV3 Block

6CB8 BI6 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6CB9 BI6 UV2BLK UV2 Block

Binary Input

6CBA BI6 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6CBB BI6 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block

6CBC BI6 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block

6CBD BI6 NP1BLK NPS1 Block

6CBE BI6 NP2BLK NPS2 Block

6CBF BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

Page 206: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 206/215

 

    205     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

6CC0 BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open

6CC1 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close

6CC2 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase6CC3 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase

6CC4 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase

6CC5 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase

6CC6 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset

6CC7 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock

6CC8 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6CC9 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.

6CCA BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

6CCB BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

6CCC BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.

6CCD BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control

6CCE BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control

6CCF BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input

6CD0 BI6 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6CD1 BI6 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block

6CD2 BI6 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

Binary Input

6CD3 BI6 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

Page 207: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 207/215

 

    206     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type

7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation

7400 BO1 In #1 Functions

7401 BO1 In #2 Functions

7402 BO1 In #3 Functions

7403 BO1 In #4 Functions

7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type

742B BO2 Reset Reset operation

7404 BO2 In #1 Functions

7405 BO2 In #2 Functions

7406 BO2 In #3 Functions

7407 BO2 In #4 Functions

7451 BO2 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type

742D BO3 Reset Reset operation

7408 BO3 In #1 Functions

7409 BO3 In #2 Functions

740A BO3 In #3 Functions

740B BO3 In #4 Functions

7452 BO3 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type

742F BO4 Reset Reset operation

740C BO4 In #1 Functions

740D BO4 In #2 Functions

740EBO4 In #3 Functions

740F BO4 In #4 Functions

Binary Output

7453 BO4 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

Page 208: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 208/215

 

    207     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type

7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation

7022 LED2 Logic LED2 Logic Gate Type7023 LED2 Reset LED2 Reset operation

7024 LED3 Logic LED3 Logic Gate Type

7025 LED3 Reset LED3 Reset operation

7026 LED4 Logic LED4 Logic Gate Type

7027 LED4 Reset LED4 Reset operation

7028 LED5 Logic LED5 Logic Gate Type

7029 LED5 Reset LED5 Reset operation

702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type

702B LED7 Reset LED6 Reset operation

7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions

7001 LED1 In #2 LED Functions

7002 LED1 In #3 LED Functions7003 LED1 In #4 LED Functions

7004 LED2 In #1 LED Functions

7005 LED2 In #2 LED Functions

7006 LED2 In #3 LED Functions

7007 LED2 In #4 LED Functions

7008 LED3 In #1 LED Functions

7009 LED3 In #2 LED Functions

700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions

700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions

700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions

700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions

700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions

7010 LED5 In #1 LED Functions

7011 LED5 In #2 LED Functions

7012 LED5 In #3 LED Functions

7013 LED5 In #4 LED Functions

7014 LED6 In #1 LED Functions

7015 LED6 In #2 LED Functions

7016 LED6 In #3 LED Functions

7017 LED6 In #4 LED Functions

7060 LED1 Color LED Color

7061 LED2 Color LED Color

7062 LED3 Color LED Color7063 LED4 Color LED Color

7064 LED5 Color LED Color

7065 LED6 Color LED Color

7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color

7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation

7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation

7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED

7031 IND1 BIT2 Virtual LED

7032 IND1 BIT3 Virtual LED

7033 IND1 BIT4 Virtual LED

7034 IND1 BIT5 Virtual LED

7035 IND1 BIT6 Virtual LED7036 IND1 BIT7 Virtual LED

Configurable LED

7037 IND1 BIT8 Virtual LED

Page 209: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 209/215

 

    208     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

7038 IND2 BIT1 Virtual LED

7039 IND2 BIT2 Virtual LED

703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED

703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED

703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED

703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED

Configurable LED

703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED

6800 Active gp. Active setting group

6803 AOLED ALARM LED light control for alarm output

6804 Control Control enable

6805 Interlock Interlock enable

6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)

Active group/

Common

6807 Frequency Frequency

Page 210: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 210/215

 

    209     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

4C00 PVT VT ratio

4C01 RVT Residual VT ratio

4017 SVCNT AC input imbalance

4000 OV OV1EN OV1 Enable

4001 OV OV2EN OV2 Enable

4002 OV OV3EN OV3 Enable

4003 UV UV1EN UV1 Enable

4004 UV UV2EN UV2 Enable

4005 UV UV3EN UV3 Enable

4006 UV VBLK UVBLOCK Enable

4007 ZPS ZPS1EN ZPS1 Enable

4008 ZPS ZPS2EN ZPS2 Enable

4009  NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable

400A  NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable

400B FRQ1 FT1 FRQ1 Enable / Type

400C FRQ1 DFT1 DFRQ1 Enable / Type

400D FRQ1 Logic1 FRQ1 Logic

400E FRQ2 FT2 FRQ2 Enable / Type

400F FRQ2 DFT2 DFRQ2 Enable / Type

4010 FRQ2 Logic2 FRQ2 Logic

4011 FRQ3 FT3 FRQ3 Enable / Type

4012 FRQ3 DFT3 DFRQ3 Enable / Type

4013 FRQ3 Logic3 FRQ3 Logic

4014 FRQ4 FT4 FRQ4 Enable / Type

4015 FRQ4 DFT4 DFRQ4 Enable / Type

4016 FRQ4 Logic4 FRQ4 Logic

4800 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting4803 OV TOV1 OV1 Time multiplier setting

4400 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting

4804 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay

4805 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio

4801 OV OV2 OV2 Threshold setting

4816 OV TOV2 OV2 Time multiplier setting

4401 OV TOV2 OV2 Definite time setting

4817 OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay

4806 OV OV2DPR OV2 DO/PU ratio

4802 OV OV3 OV3 Threshold setting

4402 OV TOV3 OV3 Definite time setting

4807 OV OV3DPR OV3 DO/PU ratio4818 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1

4819 OV OV1-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1

481A OV OV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1

481B OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2

481C OV OV2-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2

481D OV OV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2

Protection

Page 211: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 211/215

 

    210     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

4808 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting

480B UV TUV1 UV1 Time multiplier setting

4403 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting

480C UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay

4809 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting

481E UV TUV2 UV2 Time multiplier setting

4404 UV TUV2 UV2 Definite time setting

481F UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay

480A UV UV3 UV2 Threshold setting

4405 UV TUV3 UV3 Definite time setting

480D UV VBLK UV Block Threshold setting

4820 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1

4821 UV UV1-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1

4822 UV UV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1

4823 UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2

4824 UV UV2-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2

4825 UV UV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2

480E ZPS ZPS1 ZPS1 Threshold setting

4810 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Time multiplier setting

4406 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Definite time setting

4811 ZPS TZPS1R ZPS1 Definite time reset delay

480F ZPS ZPS2 ZPS2 Threshold setting

4826 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Time multiplier setting

4407 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Definite time setting

4827 ZPS TZPS2R ZPS2 Definite time reset delay

4828 ZPS ZPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1

4829 ZPS ZPS 1-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1482A ZPS ZPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1

482B ZPS ZPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2

482C ZPS ZPS 2-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2

482D ZPS ZPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2

4812 NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting

4814 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Time multiplier setting

4408 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting

4815 NPS TNPS1R NPS1 Definite time reset delay

4813 NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting

482E NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Time multiplier setting

4409 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting

482F NPS TNPS2R NPS2 Definite time reset delay4830 NPS NPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1

4831  NPS  NPS 1-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1

4832 NPS NPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1

4833 NPS NPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2

4834  NPS  NPS 2-α  Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2

4835 NPS NPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2

Protection 

Page 212: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 212/215

 

    211     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Setting Group(Menu)

Address Name Contents

4836 FRQ F11 F11 Threshold setting

440A FRQ TF11 F11 Time delay setting

4837 FRQ F12 F12 Threshold setting440B FRQ TF12 F12 Time delay setting

4838 FRQ DF1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting

4839 FRQ F21 F21 Threshold setting

440C FRQ TF21 F21 Time delay setting

483A FRQ F22 F22 Threshold setting

440D FRQ TF22 F22 Time delay setting

483B FRQ DF2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting

483C FRQ F31 F31 Threshold setting

440E FRQ TF31 F31 Time delay setting

483D FRQ F32 F32 Threshold setting

440F FRQ TF32 F32 Time delay setting

483E FRQ DF3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting483F FRQ F41 F41 Threshold setting

4410 FRQ TF41 F41 Time delay setting

4840 FRQ F42 F42 Threshold setting

4411 FRQ TF42 F42 Time delay setting

4841 FRQ DF4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting

Protection 

4842 FRQ FVBLK FRQ Block threshold setting

Page 213: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 213/215

 

    212     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

 Appendix M

Ordering

Page 214: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 214/215

 

    213     

6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6

Ordering

Under/Overvoltage Relay   A 

GRE130 0

Type:

Voltage Relay GRE130

Model:

- Model 410: Four pole

2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail

6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail

6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail

410

411

412

Rating:

VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac

VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc

VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc

1

2

 A

Standard and language:

IEC (English)

 ANSI (English)

Chinese

0

1

2

Communication:

RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)

RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

Following options can be equipped

with Model 402 and 422 only

RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)

RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0)

100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)

100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)

100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)

+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

10

11

20

21

 A0

 A1

B0

B1

C0

C1

D0

D1

Page 215: 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

8/11/2019 6F2T0176_r1.1_GRE130_manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/6f2t0176r11gre130manualpdf 215/215

 6  F  2  T  0  1  7  6